Home

Dodge 2009 Ram 1500 User's Manual

1. 81c3c744 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 81c3c739 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Check Gauges Premium Cluster Only check This light illuminates when the Voltmeter Engine Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature gauges indicate a reading either too high or too low Examine the gauges carefully and follow the instructions contained below for each indicated problem NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the Fuel Gauge Voltmeter Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant Temperature gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 2 Voltmeter When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical sys tem should be serviced NOTE e If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of the gauge the Check Gauges indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound e The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at vari
2. lIel Ici VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION i 6 o6 nim 9g noe u
3. 8163e6a8 Ignition Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key Ignition Switch Positions 1 ACC ACCESSORY 4 ON RUN 2 LOCK 5 START 3 OFF ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING NOTE e If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tempo rarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service The power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended
4. 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward To unlock the door turn the key forward For door lock lubrication see Body Lubri cation in Section 7 of this manual STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON
5. 00040 360 Inside Rearview Mirror 00 0 82 Instrument Cluster cesar eus 0 00 00 0000 186 188 Instrument Panel and Controls 184 185 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 457 Integrated Power Module Fuses 458 Interior Appearance Care sacan esri notai 455 Interior Lights oriei sa eid ded Re Es 132 en INDEX 517 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 138 Introduction ar sone pase a ea e eee 4 Jack Op ration 2 5 ie patta ese sangs 407 409 Jacking Instructions llle 407 Jump Starting oa c cie ken ae ead eh ae bbs ee 419 Key Programming 4 23 4 40060a o eas 17 Key Replacement casera mssi taia c ce eee 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 0 15 Keyless Entry System 0 0 00000005 20 Keys i39 e133 bo Seba deed Peg eng ede Ste 12 Knee Bolster uos ror smedLU OSEE eques 47 Lane Change and Turn Signals 136 Lap Belts aeei raairid r esd eves RS ERE 44 Lap Shoulder Belts lille 35 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CEhldren 4222222 eR RR RR E ESTAS eae 64 L t heS er ana dss ya CURRERE Ge A 76 Leaks Fluid Lite of Tires i usar LR RIA ea Ca EG 359 Light Bulbs s ee ere Re RIRs 76 Lights iecore erdt teen ert gre 76 132 Anti Lock Anti Lock Warning 00002000005 Brake Watning 4a debe es Geass Bulb Replacement Cap Top Clearance Cargo Center Mounted Stop Courtesy Reading Cruise see
6. MPEG Specification Sampling Fre quency dz Bit rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressin
7. 1 Headlight Switch 2 Air Outlets 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Climate Controls 5 Radio 6 Passenger Airbag 7 Glove Compartment 8 Passenger Airbag On Off Switch 9 Power Outlet 10 Heated Seat Switch 11 TPMS Light Load Reset Switch 12 Power Sliding Back Glass Switch 13 Cupholders 14 ESP Off Switch 15 Cigar Lighter 040101429 16 Transfer Case Control Switch 17 Parking Brake Release Lever 18 Adjustable Pedal Control Switch If Equipped POWER WAGON 1 Headlight Switch 2 Air Outlets 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Climate Controls 5 Radio If Equipped 6 Passenger Airbag 7 Glove Compartment 8 Power Outlet 9 Heated Seat Switch 10 TPMS Light Load Reset Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 81c3c9b7 11 Cup Holders 12 Cigar Lighter 13 Electronic Axle Locker and Disconnecting Sway Bar Switch 14 Parking Brake Release Lever 15 Adjustable Pedal Control Switch 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE
8. 7 Shift the transmission into PARK WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 400 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage the internal parts Recreational Towing Procedure Electronic Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Depress the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for four seconds 7 After shift is completed a
9. Mix Pe Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets Defrost Sq Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and side window demist outlets NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Blower Control The rotary knob on the left of the o control panel is the blower control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower off turn the knob to the far left position 816463cd es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Dual Zone Temperature Control 816463c0 Dual Zone Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment This is accomplished by having separate temperature control slides for both the driver and front passenger The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures Circulation The cab is designed with features to promote outside air circulation There are grilles in the cab back panel These are air exhausters that provide the means for regular exchange of cab air Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the window glass to help prevent inte
10. 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly re
11. CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNING e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to the main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles CAUTION To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing always use one of the following methods e The transfer case must be in the neutral position and the transmission must be in PARK to tow a 4 Wheel Drive vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised e The manufacturer recomme
12. WARM WEATHER TE If sunny set the Mode control at or near 7j and press the Lol button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 75 No C amp gt is necessary COOL OR COLD HUMID CONDITIONS 05 6 id a 80 If sunny set the Mode control at or between p and then press the lt button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near zJ No lt is necessary COLD DRY CONDITIONS gx In cloudy or dark weather set the Mode control at or near 4 If sunny set the Mode control at or between J and 4 and for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat to the windshield use 4 EXTREME COLD CONDITIONS DIESEL e Using re circulated air can aid initial warm up in extreme cold conditions NOTICE Running in amp amp MAX for long periods of time will result in window fogging When this occurs use ED until windows clear This will deactivate MAX SINGLE ZONE VEHICLES Set the mode control at JH amp MAX close the panel vents and set the temperature control to full hot Turn blower control knob to low and gradually increase as air and engine temperature increase DUAL ZONE VEHICLES Set the mode control at set both temperature controls to full hot and press the amp amp MAX button Turn blower control knob to low and gradually increase as air and engine temperature increase WINDOW FOGGING In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the 4X
13. When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with a luggage rack do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor mance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED EQUIPPED E j The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 044907138 The optional Video Entertainment System VES con sists of a DVD player and LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two head 943003161 sets The system is located in the h
14. es STARTING AND OPERATING 363 SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ag gressive tread designs such as those on ON OFF Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the NOTE On Canadian vehicles only if your vehicle is proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is equipped with All Season type tires on the front and permissible if desired The reaso
15. 2500 3500 4x4 models only Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 489 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME M A _ eee IM 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service i 66 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires N filter JJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the ME Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 l Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 4x4 models only J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary S 1 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only T 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing E g 1 Inspect the CV Joints 1 J Inspect exhaust system L E S
16. Accel 4 Set 2 Cancel 5 Cruise 3 Decel 6 On Off NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button to the ON position In the instrument cluster the word CRUISE illuminates when the system is on To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle or pressing the CAN CEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing the memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory system to cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME button Resume can be used
17. After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the PHONE button to begin 3 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the pho
18. Ot L gj e Y awo erae ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE QIL REAR WINDOW ELECTIOCALLY REAR FOG LAMP B c DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED LOWFR AIR OUTI FT CONTROL ORE BRAKE j s TOW PPT Ames A ux BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD EN Lr SEAT BELT BLIDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON ce er e u 4 r a V amp D 2 Ka Low GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR aoe UGHTER Prin UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW sas TD be cy j E RIRBRG f2 LJ ile AR ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE SEE OWNERS INDICATOR UG Lent ores TENP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TO DOWN RUE ue MANUAL i80 010505550 6 INTRODUCTION M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders Refer to the Warranty informati
19. Seats roses prsewpemERQg Eee oad nra 119 120 Adjustment eere oh pae er ere ones 119 Child jac Rasta b RR ERR E RENS 72 Folding Floor 2 6 enande EE eee 174 Heated gaa cha geek ooo oe pas Soe TE Yu 129 Lumbar Support 000 020 0000 123 POWeE aug RE S Ue a dled Dae aa RES 124 NENNEN INDEX 523 Rear Folding si cau oe memes 126 127 Reclining eeeeeeeeeee 121 122 Reclining Rear 1 0 eee 125 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 442 479 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming sess 17 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistant sees hh 501 Service Contract sisse e e i e 503 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lesen 194 Service Manuals 0 00 0 eee eee 505 Setting the Clock 00 202 204 218 224 Shif ng iunc PT RS ERPDSS OE pte 254 Automatic Transmission lus 255 Transfer Case llle 263 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage Shoulder Belts 5222 24r m RR pii Signals Turn Sliding Rear Window POWER passu eo erties aa Airave dred eco Ba Snow Chains Tire Chains Snow Plow Snow Tires Spark Plugs ias Se Dare aia a dr Gia ad Speed Control Cruise Control Speedometer sser soir Shee ao dee pe Stabilizer
20. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW posi tions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components 81a42c0a NEUTRAL Button NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NEUTRAL Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights are located on the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a differ ent transfer case position the Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights will do the following If all shift conditions are met 1 The current Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will turn OFF 2 The selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift en STARTING AND OPERATING 267 3 When the shift is completed the Transfer Case Posi tion Indicator Light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If one or more shift conditions are not met 1 The Transfer
21. accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what isn t When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use Low Range When driving off road shift into 4L Low Range for additional traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or difficult terrain Due to the lower gearing low range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 range This will allow you to idle over obstacles and down hills with improved control and less effort Also use 4L Low Range in rain ice snow mud sand to get heavy loads rolling improve traction or whenever 4H High Range traction will not do the job Driving In Snow Mud And Sand There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in snow mud or sand The vehicle will be less responsive to steering acceleration and braking inputs Therefore you should accelerate slowly leave gr
22. freezing point before attempting jump start ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421 6 Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap plying slight pressure to the accelerator In general the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission over heating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle 422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME
23. front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is so equipped the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag unless the airbag is turned off 2500 3500 Regular Cab Vehicles Only An airbag deploy ment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position See the Passenger Airbag ON OFF Switch section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 If your vehicle does not have a rear seat see the Passenger Airbag ON OFF Switch section 3 Children that are not big
24. is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as sistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin The Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC illuminates the HomeLink symbol a house with an arrow inside it along with 1 2 or 3 indicators under it when a HomeLink button is pressed Pay attention to the indicator s as they will flash at different rates or remain solid during training If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds Release the buttons when the indicators start to flash It is recommended that a new bat
25. posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire en STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number represe
26. recommended cold tire inflation placard pressure The placard pressure is defined on the Tire and Loading Information label The Tire and Loading Information label is located on the drivers side B pillar Vehicles equipped to be operated in either the max load inflation pressure condition described on the Tire and Loading Information label or the alternative light load inflation pressure condition described on the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label may also be equipped with a Tire Light Load Inflation switch to choose the appro priate TPMS low pressure warning threshold levels based upon the vehicle load condition The Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of the driver door Operation of the Tire Light Load Inflation switch is described later in this manual section The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approxi mately 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period For information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires refer to Tire Pressure under Tires General Information in this section The tire pressure will also increase as
27. that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 DRIVING OFF ROAD RAM TRUCK ONLY Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep e Driving through standing water limits your vehi hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill 8 km h when driving through standing water choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Driving through standing water limits your vehi Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cle s braking capabilities which increases
28. 0 000000 0 134 Exterior Lights 76 Filters Air Cleaner eeepc e e deua e d eo 434 Engine Oil act aaotea ddr age Rr dnt 433 479 Engine Oil Disposal 2252 n Rd 433 Flashers Turn Signal 4 susci een 76 136 188 Flat Tire Stowage iii ede dee e RR RU rs 408 418 Flooded Engine Starting 4 252 Fluid Brake 624 vag ed a ova oa dw aia 480 Fluid Capacities 2 eee 478 Fluid Leaks 0 0 llle 76 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 450 Brak amp aec v eae aes a BR a Ss 447 Power Steering s edd ep Bes 328 nn INDEX 515 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 479 Fog Lights ces crestas an 135 193 468 Fold Flat Load Floor 00 174 Four Wheel Drive 0 00000 ee 260 Four Way Hazard Flasher 406 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 00 421 Front Axle Differential 0 448 Fuel a ciavcttavetareieecadedaveeetees 375 Adding vies Sonya ete mare wie SR e ss 379 Filler Cap Gas Cap ce RR RR 381 Gage ins a ka eau d undue dora CR C ee 200 Octane Rating s ere eec he Robe 375 479 Requirements llle 375 478 Tank Capacity 20 12 8224 nr tiara ey SUR 4 478 FUSES fo naa eG Me GS Hae ao ee es 458 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 153 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 381 428 Gasoline Fuel Gasoline Reformulated 375 Ga peS si i 9 dod Ro e Rp pcd PE RE ORG YS 188 Cool
29. 193 OL Engine secet EE 431 479 Capacity sicko ei Rev PER E does 478 Change Interval dei RR xs 432 Dipstick 3e sx erre Eres 431 Disposal cians duke T dn deese E dob 433 Filter ise is eb idedadetiadeed E P es 433 479 Filtet Disposal cec ev tata RR 433 Identification Logo llle 432 Materials Added to srede ire siia metas 433 Pressure Gauge iix PIS Adee aes 190 Recommendation Ln 432 478 Syntheti Fis emus De aee ere abe eae ale A 433 ViscOSItY obrea bpa REP REY Er nhrin 432 478 Onboard Diagnostic System 428 429 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 153 Operating Precautions 00000 428 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors lll 83 Overdrive lcs 257 Overdrive OFF Switch 0005 257 Overhead Console LL 145 146 Overhead Travel Information Center 146 Overheating Engine serete xke e x eme 191 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 505 Parking Brake zeit Rear kates st 329 Passenger Airbag On Off Switch 54 Passing Light i ck es acre aia aes e WR 137 Pedals Adjustable im ses dee ninae Rs 141 Pets eransi b ei ens spidi aed aiaia des 73 Pets Transporting orus da ka a a a a 73 Phone Cellular 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee 86 Phone Hands Free uconnect 86 Pickup BOX se a coe ee di E 176 Placard Tire and Loading Information
30. 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CLIMATE CONTROLS Heater Only If Equipped The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81646397 Manual Heating Controls m The mode control at the right of the M eT KA control panel can be set in any of the following positions 8164639b p Climate Control Location Sl 816463c5 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots Panel Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Recirculation Modes Panel or Bi Level e Select the recirculation modes when the outside air contains smoke or odors This feature allows for recircu C amp S lation of interior air only Air flows gt o through the panel outlets in this mode Kad siipsena Air flows through the panel only or through both the panel and floor vents depending on the selected mode panel vs bi level Bi Level gt e Outside air flows through the outlets located in the wg instrument panel and at the floor Mix Qt e Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor and defroster outlets Defrost S Outside air is primarily directed to the windshi
31. 2500 3500 Regular Cab Vehicles ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Only See Passenger Airbag ON OFF Switch 2500 collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator 3500 Regular Cab Vehicles Only in this section for units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to additional information inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light the vehicle e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are The Side Impact SRS Window Bags are designed to located in the center of the steering wheel and the right activate only in certain side collisions When the ORC side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a with side impact option detects a collision requiring 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
32. 277 e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will turn OFF the selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is completed the Transfer Case Position Indica tor Light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WDs 4WD LOCK Rotate the transfer case switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the ACC position NOTE The transfer case will not allow shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will flash and the original Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 2WD or 4WD LOCKs 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some 5 gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be
33. 350 nn INDEX 521 Power Door LOCKS i weer de es 28 IMIFTOES sona goatee one he ware dah oe Ye Cubes 84 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 162 SEATS 2 xa cs aee Kos dU ege ane a E Pace a 124 Sliding Rear Window llle 173 SEEMNE M 327 328 Sunroof scil den PE RE RE PE Eas 159 WindOWS ies fae he OS epee eels ede ERE 32 Power Steering Fluid ce keen 480 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 46 Pretensioners Seat Belts css bee RES RSERI LUCES 44 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry si 6005 a Ra e ERR x Rare 23 Radial Ply Tires 3 0 02500sa eaee8oaeu bees 357 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 442 444 Radio Navigation uconnect gps 224 Radio Operation ss Sa secte mu aian ee aaa 202 216 Radio Remote Controls o a ananuna aaa 231 Radio Satellite uconnect studios 224 227 Radio Sound Systems 0 202 216 Ramp Travel Index 1 6 2 0 00 00 0 00a ee 285 Rear Axle Differential 0 448 Rear Seat Folding isses 126 127 Rear Window Features 0 055 172 Rear Window Sliding ses cess esere sus aa mais 174 Reclining Front Seats 000 121 122 Reclining Rear Seats gnc ada ea ce 125 Recorder Event Data 00000008 58 Recreational Towing 0000000 397 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 398 400 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N
34. 399 402 Reformulated Gasoline lisse Refrigerant Reminder Seat Belt Remote Keyless Entry RKE 522 INDEX ee Remote Sound System Radio Controls 231 Remote Starting System llle 25 Replacement Keys 0 000000 cee eee 16 Replacement Parts eiie 430 Replacement Tit S ya sasa te ane aha as 359 Reporting Safety Defects 05 504 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 193 Restraint Head 4422449 LS dA REX RIP 123 Restraints Child lille 60 67 Restraints Occupant xis esca aene 34 Rotation Tires sreske dhe teta d adka meagan 363 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 75 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 76 Safety Defects Reporting 4 504 Safety Exhaust Gas 74 Safety Information Tire 0 346 Satety TPS e ui ghia vi RU PIU amare Gate oh aca grave 74 Satellite Radio Antenna Satellite Radio uconnect studios 224227 Schedule Maintenance llle 483 Seat Belt Maintenance 00 457 Seat Belt Reminder leeren 45 Seat Belts aeu ton poen e eaunE uH net 34 35 75 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women 00 5 46 Child Restraint coss m re 60 72 Exteridet cues aep Reed RR es 46 Front Seat 02 4 404 wane erete iea are rg E 35 Inspection scci o grasa elute des ai alae RAR ae 75 Pretensioners 6 ce Ee rg 44
35. 4L Low Range for very steep hills Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri ate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a V4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a 294 STARTING AND OPERATING ME fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll over which may result in severe injury e Driving Down Hill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controll
36. 5 iem Ee ea 381 TAGS 35 4 oho Sh wae heey PRX gee aes 350 LOCKS sig eu EEEE x ek bats aad eae eee tants 27 Child Protection 00 0 0 eee eee 30 IDOGES IET 27 Power DOOF su suis cate ea BR Re Rk oh 28 Steering Wheel 1 2 2 0 22 eee eee 14 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH i e ehe 4 4664 RARE ead E ES 64 Lubrication Body 2 eee eee 437 tig NUS 3iscedee e s me anea a baiia ae 414 Lembar S ppott 4t EE ae Bee Rug 123 Maintenance ellen 431 Maintenance Free Battery lille 434 Maintenance Procedures 00000000 431 Maintenance Schedule 483 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 194 429 Manual Service llle 505 Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check 000 0005 449 Lubricant Selection llle 480 MAOKS Iesu cue ets wh eat eB ack eek Ae 82 Automatic Dimming lees 82 INDEX Electric Powered Outside Rearview Trailer Towing Modifications Alterations Vehicle Monitor Tire Pressure System Mopar Parts Multi Function Control Lever Navigation Radio uconnect gps Navigation System uconnect gps New Vehicle Break In Period Occupant Restraints Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel Odometer Trip Off Pavement Driving Off Road Off Road Driving Off Pavement 519 366 136 520 INDEX ae Oil Change Indicator 0 000 040 193 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 0
37. Case Position Indicator Light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will continue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make sure that all of the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section of the Owner s Manual The Service AWD Warning Light monitors the electric shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the Service AWD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning This could cause damage to driveline components 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engin
38. Il LT 76 354 506 Aging Life of Tires 00040 359 Air Pressure 0 0 ee 354 Chans aique ae gee GRE TUS PEU S 361 Dual hence s aoe eed ee me 365 416 General Information llle 354 High Speed e e mn 356 Inflation Pressures 0 0000 eee 355 Jacking adbuc Ges 409 ee INDEX 525 Life of Tires 2 0 ga oaae a ee eee 359 Load Capacity isses 350 351 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 366 Pressure Warning Light 197 Quality Grading css xe ara aia eee Aaa 506 Radial ceres eeu neti eran arash REM EE 357 Replacement se set ee xac due ekpa 359 Rotation 222268464009 pe us ad Rs 363 Safely aus wade iiss pete toe Si t 346 354 OIZeS uw Gad REOR BAe eo RAs eae 347 SNOW TITES usos sos ay A adh nee dre RA RON S 363 Spare Tire 24 Shei eae pesce RES RE e ies 408 Spinning ise 9 REA ex Eds 357 Tread Wear Indicators lesus 358 Wheel Mounting selle 409 Wheel Nut Torque 414 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 389 Torque Converter Clutch 040 259 Tow Hooks Emergency ssanie 422 TOWING cea nie g ottica eee ees Dalits eg SE CAT ed 383 24 Hour Towing Assistance 101 Disabled Vehicle llle 422 Guider 5 4 5 cs adu RS hae sane PE Ed 389 Recreational llle 397 Weight uve rere eR e ees 389 Towing Assistance llle 101 Traction 343 e pA R4 d deel iv mbAa oS
39. MODE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to the uconnect phone section of this Owner s Manual Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the uconnect studios Satellite Radio section of this Owner s Manual 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SALES CODE REC AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH uconnect gps NAVIGATION 81c704b4 Satellite Navigation Radio and CD Player with MP3 Capability REC combines a CGlobal Positioning System based navigation system with an integrated color screen to provide maps turn identification selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina tions and routes AM FM stereo radio and six disc CD changer with MP3 capability Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a DVD that is loaded into the unit One map DVD covers all of North America Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions REC Setting the Clock GPS Clock The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich
40. MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid NVG 246 Automatic Transfer Case MOPAR PN 05179014AA NVG 246 Automatic Transmission Fluid or Only equivalent 2500 3500 Model Front and Rear Synthetic GL 5 SAE 75W 90 or equivalent Limited Slip 10 5 11 5 inch Axle Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 482 Required Maintenance Intervals Mi Maintenance Schedule 483 CO MmreomMm zon mo2Zzr2zmazZz rZz M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 482 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance service
41. Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition OFF ON will also return the sound from the speakers ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function Aa PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function
42. ON position If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy the airbags when the impact sensors detect a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 irritation continues see your doctor If these p
43. Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires I If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary J Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer gt Z l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 350
44. Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage 2500 3500 Model Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip oil additive friction modifiers Transfer Case Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant may be used 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the man
45. RR RR AAR RE AE a 445 Points to Remember 0 446 Pressure Cap 4s cedes s ER ROS Pre ER Td 444 Radiator Cap aester ed EP td 444 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 442 478 479 Cruise Control Speed Control 142 Cupholders see RR ees 165 Customer Assistance ees 501 Data Recorder Event 2c sk ER 58 Daytime Running Lights liess 134 NENNEN INDEX 513 Dealer Service 2 0 0 ee eee 430 Defroster Rear Window s 172 Defroster Windshield 76 235 238 Delay Intermittent Wipers 138 Differential Limited Slip 304 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission ls 450 Power Steering iust be dk RE e hb os 328 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 445 Door LOCKS 42 24 nesa kea RE ee 27 Door Opener Garage 1 0 ee eee 153 Driving Off Pavement es aege are leen 284 Off RO d isa vua oed hae Gora CE eed te 284 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water iow ac fed Gewese ad ERAS 305 Dual Rear Wheels 0000005 365 416 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 231 Electric Rear Window Defrost 172 Electrical Power Outlets 0 162 Electronic Brake Control System 333 Anti Lock Brake System 333 Brake Assist System gt noco cacete ansasen ss 335 Electronic Roll Mitigation 339 Ele
46. Sway Bar System OLAr BP 22x rue PIG ende gee OS bs Automatic Transmission Engine Fails to Start Remote 58 Pare ene Qs cae ne OE Ae Yes Starting Procedures Gas Engines 524 INDEX ae Steering Power 2 4222 Rm noaa RS Oe OR ae REG 327 328 Wheel Lock soe met RRXIEETS 14 Wheel Tilt cc ciet eRRR dade 140 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls cue E awe E eee a e 231 Storage Behind the Seat 0 167 Storage Compartment Center Seat 167 169 Storage Vehicle sci suey She Rp mes 463 Storing Your Vehicle liliis 463 S n ROOF ui His baa Sete el et Sead ete eaaet db ans 159 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 360 Sway Control Trailer 0 000000 345 Synthetic Engine Oil s siie e ee eee 433 System Navigation uconnect gps 224 System Remote Starting 000 25 Tachometer conu 4 eR RE Oe ee 189 Tailgate iu etus prey osea n ado iae tius 178 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 190 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 64 68 Tilt Steering Column 2 0 0 0 00000 140 Tip Start sesers sereta pedati e 4 64 ale A 252 Tire and Loading Information Placard 350 360 Tire Identification Number TIN 349 Tire Markings cs cg ak ook ots aia ee t dor Rees 346 Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Placard HI MAX Load Switch 184 185 Tire Safety Information 04 346
47. To Empty DTE Trip Odometer ODO Elapsed Time ET C T Button 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Compass Calibration Manual Compass Calibration Recalibrating The Compass Outside Temperature ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming Using HomeLink Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button iu arme e ceed Ree ae aed DOCULILY idu eaae dee a a bade eee ee Troubleshooting Tips General Information 151 151 151 153 153 154 157 158 158 158 158 159 Bl Power Sunroof If Equipped 159 Open Sunroof Express Mode 160 Closing Sunroof Express 160 Pinch Protect Feature 00 160 Pinch Protect Override 161 Venting Sunroof Express 161 Sunshade Operation 0 161 Wind Buffeting eese rd 161 Sunroof Maintenance 162 Sunroof Fully Closed 162 H Electrical Power Outlets 162 E Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver 164 W Cupholders 2x49 99e es whee 165 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES
48. YOUR VEHICLE M the window bags to inflate it signals the inflators on Passenger Airbag On Off Switch 2500 3500 the crash side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic Regular Cab Vehicles Only gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to children The window bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated NOTE At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar Erneut sais Passenger Airbag On Off Switch e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and positions them for the best interaction with the front airbag ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the WARNING passenger Whenever an airbag is turned off even a lap i i less th ld wh ide i ae ee shoulder belted passenger may hit their head neck the front seat because there is no rear seat because the rear seat is too s
49. a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters Continued varies considerably Only high quality filters should be ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use battery that the positive cable is attached to the a booster battery or any other booster source with positive post and the negative cable is attached to an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable the negative post Battery posts are marked clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling positive and negative and are identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connect
50. additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 378 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Fuel System Cautions e When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock If spark knock persists lighten the load or engine piston damage may result Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law octane enhancers is not recommended Many of these Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance products contain high concentrations of methanol damage the emission control system Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition the responsibility of the manufacturer malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or systems can result in civil penalties being assessed malfunctioning and may require immediate service against you Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance es STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Carbon Monoxide Warnings the
51. and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 20 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System 3 ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on
52. are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Y at a time Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Tree Setup Confirmation M Confirmation Prompts on off Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing New phone will temporarily override phone priorities Towing Assistance Select a language English Espanol or Francais List Phones System Lists Phones Sclect phone to be deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 System confirms All Phones Deleted 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download sev
53. be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability 360 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING WARNING Continued e DO NOT use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED capacity other than what was originally equipped A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load gers 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 Ibs 91 kg of cargo index could result in tire overloading and failure Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicl
54. be checked monthly when cold and d inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with th
55. behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the vehicle ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the key is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the surplus webbing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all the area behind the front seats Detaching Buckle with Key 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is an audible click Refer to the previous section for the proper seat belt usage ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the black latch and black buckle Inserting Lateh Plate 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row
56. beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS HSA Hill Start Assist Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Program ESP and Trailer Sway Control TSC All six systems work to gether to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking For more information about ABS refer to Anti Lock Brake System under Brake System in Section 5 of this manual 334 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during hard braking mane
57. button is pushed twice 13 Temperature Gauge E The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem ET perature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operat ing satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 14 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
58. by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axl
59. card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only u
60. choose the following ESP operating mode This is the only ESP operating mode in 4LO Full Off This mode is intended for off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared In this mode ESP and TCS except for the Limited Slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide 344 STARTING AND OPERATING M the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illumi nated when E
61. confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation afte
62. conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a targeted range of 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed Press and release the REMOTE START button 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during To Enter Remote Start onds The parking lights will flash and the horn Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM ex
63. damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined
64. ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 JACKING INSTRUCTIONS Jack Location The jack and jack tools are stored under the front WARNING passenger seat Lift the flap on the side of the seat for uM access e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and could be crushed Never put any part of your body sliding the assembly from under the seat under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to an authorized service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Removing The Spare Tire Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism tube Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it throu
65. enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm 4 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 5 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to inflate 6 If your vehicle has window bags do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 7 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in the If You Need Customer Assistance section later in this owner s manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to re
66. for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone E Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can
67. hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait approximately five seconds SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO uconnect phone AND VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS VES CAPABILITIES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate INFO TIME 44 RW FF gt gt 0 mE 6 DISC MP3 3 4 81365bb1 RAQ Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Push the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same
68. if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoid ing abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal 290 STARTING AND OPERATING ME air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to air the tires back up prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steer
69. items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler
70. key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your veh
71. layer if necessary Keep the wire rope under light tension and spool the wire rope back and onto the winch drum in even layers Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as necessary Repeat this process until the winch hook is the same distance as the full length of the remote control from the winch Pinch the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook strap Hold the hook strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope Walk the wire rope towards the fairlead carefully spooling in the remaining wire rope By pulsing the remote control switch 19 Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow hook es STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Rigging Techniques Various winching situations will require application of other winching techniques These could range from too little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line rigging simply increasing pulling power or main taining a straight line pulling situation You will have to assess what technique is correct for your situation Think safety at all times control cord from the control box and store in a clean and dry place Winching operations are now complete Put the cap on the solenoid plug in NOTE Always store the remote control in a protected clean dry area 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ME How to Change the Pulling Direction Change Pulling Directions 814a0e01 All winching operations should have a stra
72. ll Word About Your Keys Ignition Key Removal Locking Doors With A Key H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock uci o dng He Bee oS ES W Sentry Key ia baw n Rn CR 15 Replacement Keys 6 ee eee nii 16 Customer Key Programming 17 General Information 05 18 lll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 Rearming Of The System ww 18 To Set The Alarm ww ee ee eee 18 To Disarm The System www naaa aana aaa 19 Bl Illuminated Entry System If Equipped 20 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME lll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 20 Mi Windows s seen 32 To Unlock The Doors 21 Power Windows If Equipped 32 To Lock The Doors sce cttescse riitese ss 21 Wind B ffeting 52e dot Eee RR 33 Using The Panic Alarm 22 W Occupant Restraints 046 45 suadet Ee 34 Programming Additional RKE Transmitters 23 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 35 General Information 23 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 42 RKE Transmitter Battery Service 24 Automatic Locking Ret
73. needed 484 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a 0 O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Au
74. of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to fou
75. or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 7 Install wheel center cap and remove wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts Hub Caps Wheel Covers The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground For 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415 Insert the blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion On 3500 models with dual rear wheels DRW you must first remove the hub caps The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly The hub cap should pop off The wheel skins can now be removed For the front hub cap on 3500 models use the blade on the end of the
76. or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 21 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1
77. outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Press the button located on the upper belt guide and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best In Use Position WARNING If the black latch and buckle are not connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not restrain you properly Shoulder Belt Adjustment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use this mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until I the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the
78. performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case switch to the desired position 4 After the desired Transfer Case Position Indicator Light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case switch into the desired posi tion 4 After the desired Transfer Case Position Indicator Light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE e If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift the desired Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will flash continuously while the original Transfer Case Position Indicator Light is ON until all requirements have been met e The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no Transfer Case Position Indica tor Lights will be on or flashing If your are leaving your ve
79. position when the armrest is fully upright In an accident the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about en dangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Center Storage Compartment Bucket Seats If Equipped Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise the upper cover Inside is a power outlet if equipped a cutout for a cellular phone charger cord removable coin holder if equipped and a divider to configure the storage area into separate compartments Lift the lower handle on the front of the armrest and raise the armrest for access to the lower storage bin On Quad Cab models the r
80. press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 t Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning
81. pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation T
82. radio is reading the disc LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The LOAD LOAD 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJECT button for 5 seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be dis played On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manne
83. should be taken to avoid 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When
84. speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed NOTE On models equipped with Diesel engines the idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the Winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS sy VERY HOT Wr ue Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control knob to the high position full clockwise Set Mode control knob at or between 7J and 7J Set temperature control to full cold and press the lt button on After the hot air has been expelled close the windows and turn the mode control knob to the amp amp setting counterclockwise at either 7J or zJ or press the amp amp button if so equipped Once comfortable choose a mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort
85. sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Se These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of 4X2 model trucks NOTE The use of class U chains is permitted on the front and rear of 4X4 2500 model trucks with LT245 70R17E tires The use of class U chains is permitted on the front and rear of 4X4 3500 model trucks with Dual Rear Wheels and LT235 80R17E tires On 4X2 2500 3500 model trucks class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 and LT235 80R17 size tires e On 4x4 2500 3500 SRW Single Rear Wheel model trucks class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LT265 70R17E CAUTION Do not use tire chains on 4x4 model trucks equipped with P265 70R17 LT275 70R17 P275 60R20 tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of 2500 3500 SRW Single Rear Wheels equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 LT235 80R17 tires or 4X4 front wheels equipped with LT265 70R17E There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle
86. the blanket slack the tension on the wire rope first 14 Establish no people zones Make your intentions clear Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity surrounding the winching operation is completely aware of your intentions before you pull Declare where the spectators should not stand never behind or in front of 322 STARTING AND OPERATING M the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch block Your situation may have other no people zones 814a0ddc No People Zones 15 Begin winching With the winching vehicles engine on and light tension already on the wire rope begin winching slowly and steadily Be sure that the wire rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum For additional assistance the winched vehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled by the winch Continue pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground If you are able to drive the vehicle the winching operation is complete Using The Remote Control NOTE e Avoid overheating the winch motor For extended winching stop at reasonable intervals to allow the winch motor to cool down What to look for under load The wire rope must ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 large enough to cause serious damage to the winch So line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate To fix an uneven stack spool out that section of the rope and rep
87. the frame Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher A G9 69 v Jack Warning Label 060505396 1 Remove the spare wheel jack and tools from storage 4x2 Jacking Location 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES e Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench The tube extension may be used but is not required e For 2500 3500 4x4 series trucks when changing the front wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the front Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 060505397 4x4 Jacking Location e For all trucks when changing a rear wheel as semble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes extending to the rear ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 NOTE If the 2500 3500 bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be neces sary to use t
88. the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance it is advisable to use either TOW HAUL or O D OFF modes which can be selected by pressing the TOW HAUL O D OFF button located at the end of the shift lever WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The two optional overhead consoles may consist of the following features Y 80f4cff6 Overhead Console Features e Courtesy Reading Lights e Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer CMTC If Equipped UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 e Universal Garage Door Opener If Equipped Courtesy Reading Lights In the middle of the console are two courtesy reading lights Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position fully upward position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing the recessed area of the corresponding lens NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a s
89. the manufacturer s instructions 022607075 Mega Cab Tether Anchor 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While crui
90. the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK Rotate the transfer case switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after turning the switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either RUNNING or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the accessory ACC position 2WD or 4WD AUTO or 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case switch to the desired position 4 After the desired Transfer Case Position Indicator Light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop 2 With the key ON and the engine either off or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate th
91. the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transmission into NEUTRAL While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE e Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift the transmission into NEUTRAL hold foot on brake and turn the engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode 264 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h e Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the transmission is in gear Transfer Case Position Indicator Light The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions Five Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronically sh
92. the winch drum to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand 7 Remote Control The remote control provides the interface between the winch operator and the winch The remote control provides the ability to power the winch in out and stop the winch To operate the winch the toggle switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to power the winch out The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral center position CAUTION If not installed the hook strap must be placed on the hook Fairlead The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope and minimizes damage to the rope 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Winch Accessories The following accessories are necessary to attach the winch to anchors change direction of pull and for safe winching 8149d0ee Gloves Wire rope through use will develop barbs which can slice skin It is ex tremely important to wear protective gloves while oper ating the winch or handling the wire rope Avoid loose fit ting clothes or anything that could become entangled in the wire rope and other mov ing parts 8149d0ea Snatch Block Pulley Used properly the multi purpose snatch block allows you to 1 increase the winch s pulling power and 2 change your pulling direction without damaging the wire rope Proper use of the snatch block is covered in Before You Pull en STARTING AND OPERATI
93. there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a key related transponder fault unless the additional part is physi cally held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other Radio Frequency RF electronics will not cause inter ference with this system All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an au
94. tire failure INDEX 510 INDEX ME Adding Fuel Adjustable Pedals Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 434 Air Conditioner Maintenance 435 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 435 436 Air Conditioning System 237 435 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 240 Air Pressure Tires secta ct 0 00000 uuu uae 355 360 Aiba es oan eee eae cy eek eee eee 34 47 54 Airbag Light 222r be ws bas 58 75 189 Airbag On Off Switch llle 54 Alarm Light 2 449 03 4 erbe nn Ps 191 Alarm Security Alarm lessen 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 0000 230 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 442 443 478 Disposal eer ceu a eaters one a be 445 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 333 Anti Lock Warning Light 196 332 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Anti Theft System 2 0 6 eee eee 18 Appearance Care 4 a ke bebo OUR Ed 452 AShitray asc nece senio qa tere dS SUR av ees 164 Assistance TOWING icm x escasa eyed 101 Automatic Dimming Mirror 4 82 Automatic Transaxle 00 00000 eee 12 Interlock System i sexcentos 14 Automatic Transmission Adding Fluid uendere tex deb end 451 Fluid and Filter Changes 452 Fluid Level Check 0005 449 450 Fluid Type ier caw e
95. tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure DO NOT make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inf
96. turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 8 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph kph 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 9 Oil Pressure Gauge Premium Cluster Only E The pointer should always indicate some oil pres sure when the engine is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction Immedi ate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer NOTE If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of the gauge the Check Gauges indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound 10 Transfer Case Position This display indicator shows the transfer case position selection For additional information refer to 4 Wheel Drive Op eration in section 5 of this manual 11 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of rund the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL OD OFF button is pushed once 12 OD OFF The OD OFF button is located at the end of the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL OD OFF
97. vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps with a clevis pin These heavy metal objects could become projectiles if a strap breaks which could cause severe injury Never leave more than two or three feet of slack in the strap More slack than this greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle dam age Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from a strapping or winching situation e Winching Refer to Winch Operation for addi tional information Winching is most commonly used in the following situations there is no support vehicle available a high controlled force is required to recover the vehicle there is a high risk of environmen tal or vehicle damage or where nothing else seems to work A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of control It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow controlled manner This control works well for avoiding further vehicle dam age Once you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good anchor point It needs to be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle s weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as possible Use block and tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the winch s pulling force If the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap If it is another vehicle then place that vehicle in PARK
98. vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Tree Main Menu Towing English UConnect Francais Last See mina ee Phonebook umber on Phone Flowchart is redialed See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired
99. vehicle has traveled es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 When the fuel economy is reset the display will momen tarily blank Then the history will be erased and the AVERAGING WILL CONTINUE FROM WHERE IT WAS BEFORE THE RESET The reset value is based on a minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous drive cycle The display may take several miles kilometers for this value to change depen dent upon driving habits Distance To Empty DTE The distance to empty DTE shows the estimated dis tance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level NOTE e The DTE cannot be reset e Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to an alternating test display of LO and FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LO FUEL text and a new DTE value will be displayed based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level NOTE It is possible for DTE to display LO FUEL before the low fuel
100. volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON MODE Button Radio Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player Satellite Radio or Video Entertainment Sys tem VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time MS
101. warning light turns on in the instru ment cluster This could occur because low fuel warning is set to a specified fuel tank volume and DTE is an estimated distance calculation based on fuel economy and remaining fuel tank volume Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows e 34 gal 128 L 2500 3500 Power Wagon short box models e 35 gal 132 L 2500 3500 Power Wagon long box models 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Trip Odometer ODO NOTE The maximum value is approximately 6000 miles 9956 km Then the trip odometer must be reset in order to update the trip odometer miles kilometers This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer to change to zero Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause the display to change to zero C T Button Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate the direction in which the vehicle is facing 811d4aea C T Button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Automatic
102. will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 SEEK Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player The radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the
103. you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 oven cle
104. 0 4X4 Models 2 0000020 Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades i 437 Adding Washer Fluid 438 Exhaust System sleep IRR eee 438 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System ww eee 441 Fog Lights sese x a ia EN ces 468 Brake System 6 ee 447 Tail Stop Turn And Backup Lights 469 Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Center High Mounted Stoplight CHMSL Ja 73 c wcnandee aneiceus beach awe sears ates 448 With Cargo Light S A 472 Transfer Case ahve a hie eae A kaiia 449 Cab Top Clearance Lights If Equipped 473 Automatic Transmission 449 i Tailgate ID Lights Dual Rear Wheels Appearance Care And Protection From If Equipped csse RR ERR 475 COE OSIOD ck ceo PRU CHRIS a YU e es 452 Rear Light Bar ID Marker E Fuses se ma A ate e ance at ee 458 Dual Rear Wheel If Equipped MEE 476 Integrated Power Module 498 Side Marker Lights Dual Rear Wheels 477 xL NM E ME noe H Fluids And Capacities 2 seen 478 me Rp lacemicns LIEW Bulbs suka vera dinait es iid ll Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 479 Mi Bulb Replacement eeese 465 D E ae 479 Headlight Halogen Front Park And Turn f Lie MES MM NE 465 eee ee 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L
105. 0 4x4 models only Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the transfer case fluid OOOO O O O L M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 14 Rotate tires 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires 2 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary 4x4 models only M Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only T Flush and replace the power steering JJ Inspect the CV Joints fluid 1 Inspect exhaust system d Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized C
106. 19 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed
107. 27 TSC Trailer Sway Control Power Steering Fluid Check 328 Wi Tire Safety Information M Parking Brake suamsdcra ok eed cR ERES 329 Tire Marking M Brake System 6 ww eee 330 Tire Identification Number TIN 349 Roe ene as CEN ident aan Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 350 Hour Whecl aie TOC Brake Oren Eber gal lal Tires General Information 354 a Mr qe pd asia u See 333 Tire Pressure sags ise rep Wes cae daa 354 Tire Inflation Pressures 355 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 333 250 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation Radial Ply Tires Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire Replacement Tires ll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information If Equipped s i5 sore e e tes Bi Tire Chains la Snow Tires 2v ce ee Rw RS Bl Tire Rotation Recommendations Dual Rear Wheels Wi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS It Equipped ep eR Ree rex ER 356 Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Description If Equipped Tire Pressure Monitor System Components General Information lll Fuel Requirements Reformulated Gasoline Gasoline Oxygenate Blends E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles MMT In Gasoline Materials Added To Fuel Fuel System Cautions C
108. 78 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 2500 3500 Shortbed Models 34 Gallons 129 Liters 2500 3500 Longbed Models 35 Gallons 132 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified For trucks oper ating under a gross combined weight rating less than 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 30 API Certified For 2500 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters greater than 14 000 lbs 6 350 kg Cooling System 5 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 18 7 Quarts 17 7 Liters ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 5 7L Engine For trucks operating under a gross com bined weight rating less than 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 5 7L Engine For 2500 3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight rating greater than 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard
109. 9 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle WARNUNG The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully B be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as WARNING e A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the airbag deployed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
110. 97 22 Cargo Light The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the ON Cargo Lamp is activated by pressing the Cargo i Light Button on the headlight switch 23 SERV 4WD Indicator The 4WD indicator will be illuminated when ever the 4WD mode is engaged for either the manual or electric shift 4WD systems The SERV 4WD indicator monitors the electric shift 4WD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required SERV 4 24 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Warning Lamp If Equipped The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS warning lamp is in the instrument cluster it ESP BAS comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position it should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS warning lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible NOTE The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is actively operating 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided i should
111. Adjuster If Equipped Reclining Seats Quad Cab Models Reclining Seats 2500 3500 Models Adjustable Head Restraints Manual Lumbar Support If Equipped Power Seats If Equipped Rear Seat Features Heated Seats If Equipped 114 114 116 119 119 120 121 122 123 ll To Open And Close The Hood B Lights Interior Lights Battery Saver Headlight Delay Headlights Parking Lights And Panel Lights Daytime Running Lights Canada Only And Fleet Vehicles llle Lights On Reminder Fog Lights If Equipped Cargo Light If Equipped Multifunction Lever een UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers Intermittent Wiper System Windshield Washers B Tilt Steering Column ll Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped Adjustment Wi Electronic Speed Control If Equipped To Activate To Set a Desired Speed To Deactivate To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing ll Overhead Console If Equipped Courtesy Reading Lights E Overhead Console With Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer If Equipped US M Button Reset Button Global Reset Step Button Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO Distance
112. B PILLAR PLACARD FRONT 345 kPa 50 PSI LIGHT LOAD INFLATION PRESSURE COLD MAX LOAD INFLATION PRESSURE COLD TIRE SIZE LT265 7017E SEE OWNERS MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 280 kPa 40 PSI 485 kPa 70 PSI LT265 70R17E 66268494 410 kPa GO PSI 81c57c10 Example Supplemental Tire Pressure Label To switch from the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold begin by placing the ignition switch in the RUN position Next lower all four road tire pressures to the Light Load Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Tire Pressure Information label The Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of the driver door Use an accurate tire gauge to check the tire pressures when lowering all four tire pressures After all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures press the tire light load inflation switch If the tire light load inflation switch s amber colored LED turns ON the TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresh olds If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED flashes on and off for 10 seconds after all four tire pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures the pressure in any one of the four tires may not be at the light
113. Case 17 Red Brake 18 40 Amp ABS Pump 26 20Amp Brake Switch Center Green Yellow High Mount Stop 19 30 Amp Trailer Tow Battery Light CHMSL Pink Feed Aftermarket CHMSL ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Yellow Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 27 40 Amp Power Seats 32 10 Amp Power Ignition Run Green Red Adjustable Pedals 28 10 Amp Power Run Start LED Red PCM Steering Angle 33 10Amp Power IGN Run Sensor Red HVAC 29 10Amp 4X4 Switch Pass Dr 34 Red Switch EC Mirror 35 15 Amp Cabin Compartment 30 15 Amp Power Run Start Blue Node CCN Illumi Blue ABS RWAL Smart nation Bar YAW Sensor 36 25 Amp Audio_Amplifier Universal Exhaust Natural ee 37 15 Amp Variable Gate Turbo ud eae Blue VGT Turbo Die 31 10 Amp PCM Gas TCM sel Red Diese REE 38 20 Amp Power Outlet IP 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fuse Fuse 39 10Amp Seatbelt Tension When installing the Integrated Power Module Red Reducer Power IGN cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop Run Acc erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so 40 20Amp Power IGN Run Acc may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Yellow Cigar Lighter Rear Module and possibly result in a electrical system Power Point failure 41 When replacing a blown fuse it is im
114. Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will be displayed After completing up to three 360 degree turns with the vehicle traveling less than 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal or metallic objects the CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally Manual Compass Calibration NOTE To ensure proper compass calibration make sure the compass variance is properly set before manu ally calibrating the compass If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does not appear you must manually put the compass into the Calibration mode Recalibrating The Compass Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position then set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button to change the display between VAR compass variance and CAL compass calibration modes When the CAL symbol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area free from large metal objects or power lines The CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from North is great enough to cause the compass to give false the overhead console This is where the compass sensor is readings If this occurs the compass variance must be set loca
115. D 6 O nan 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 11 Coolant Pressure Cap 6 Integrated Power Module 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBDII This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur I
116. E 459 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 1 20Amp Power Outlet Console 9 30 Amp Off Road Module Yellow Pink Power 2 20Amp Cabin Compartment 10 5 Amp Trx Off Rd Pkg Sen Yellow Node CCN Door Orange Gas Engine Only Locks NOTE Insert 5 amp 3 fuse in this cavity to 4 15 Amp Aisin Transmission enable ihe TRY capa bility If Equipped Blue Controls Diesel Only m ETT An URD m nition raw 5 20 Amp Power Sunroof PE d OD Cabin Cone Yellow partment Node 6 10 Amp Vistronic Fan CCN Radio Under Red Wastegate Solenoid Hood Lamp Wireless 7 Control Module 8 10Amp Heated Mirrors WCM Satellite Digi Red tal Audio Receiver SDARS Hands Free Module HFM EOM 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 12 30 Amp Electric Brake 20 10 Amp Occupant Restraints Pink Red Controller ORC 2 13 25 Amp Power Battery 21 10 Amp Occupant Restraints Natural RWAL ABS Module Red Pass Disable Switch Feed 22 2 Amp IGN Switch Feed 14 15 Amp Park Lights Left Gray Blue 23 10 Amp HVAC 15 20 Amp Trailer Park Lights Red Yellow 24 20 Amp AISIN Relay Feed 16 15 Amp _ Park Lights Right Blue Diesel Only Blue 25 10 Amp Power Mirror T
117. ER e nee 463 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video System 00 231 Voice Recognition System VR 114 Voltmeter scs vob hee er bead PE RP ed 188 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description Cd oer ee ee Ea eere 188 Warnings and Cautions 0004 6 Warranty Information 00 504 Washers Windshield 139 438 Washing Vehicle 0 0 0 2 ee eee ee 453 en INDEX 527 Water Driving Through 0000 305 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0 0005 454 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 454 Wheel Cover 0 0 0 eee eee ees 414 Wheel Mounting cbe koe rer oem doe ds 409 Wheel Nut Torque 414 417 MIS METERS UTRIUS TD T 308 Accessories lees 312 Operation uade Ee db eden eames esei 313 Rigging Techniques 00 325 Usage axe Pad PE Eee des 308 Wind Buffeting vico me RR ee 33 161 Window Fogging erias srecisooe nister iita 244 MAandOWS aequore ex hor TG eS bled de Gard 32 Power 2i xe REP PORE Pu RE qus 32 Rear Sliding peyare t RR Ee eR 174 Windshield Defroster 76 235 238 Windshield Washers 138 139 438 Ed ohare een og Pu Se A 438 Windshield Wiper Blades 437 Windshield Wipers i2 tren 138 Wiper Blade Replacement 437 Wipers Intermittent cs sciet anseia mia taes 138 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMEN
118. G Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases
119. G or INFO Button Radio Mode Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a radio text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will be displayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the Rewind Fast Forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the channel number AM EM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the r
120. HICLE 29 3 Place the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock On Exit If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and all doors closed Auto Unlock On Exit Programming If Equipped Customer programming sequence to enable or disable the Auto Unlock on Exit feature 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock
121. Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other
122. ME Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in launching a vehicle on an incline HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short duration the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the incline The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied During operation Hill Start Assist will activate the brake control system and a clicking noise will occur If your foot is on the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight pedal movement The clicking and pedal move ment is normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 7 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 The system
123. Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 NOTE For 2500 3500 trucks with a 5 7L engine oper ating under a gross combined weight rating of 14 000 Ibs 6 350 kg or greater SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recom mended for all operating temperatures Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filter
124. Mean Time GMT This is ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set 1 At the Main Menu screen highlight Clock Setup and press ENTER OR press and hold the TIME button on the unit s faceplate for three seconds The Clock Setup screen appears Clock Setup GPS Clock FM 92 5 On CHRYSLER DRE 81999ef2 2 To show the GPS clock select Displayed Clock GPS Clock and press ENTER 3 To adjust the time zone Select Time Zone and press ENTER Select the appropriate time zone and press ENTER 4 To turn daylight savings on or off select Daylight Savings and press ENTER Select On or Off and press ENTER 5 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CANCEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M User Defined Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the system clock you can manually adjust the time by choosing the User Defined Clock option 1 At the Clock Setup screen highlight Displayed Clock User Defined Clock FM 92 5 On CHRYSLER DR E 81999ef6 2 To increase the clock by hours make sure HR is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another hour You wil
125. NG 313 8149d0e6 8149d0fd Clevis D Shackles The D Shackle is a safe means of connecting the looped ends of cables straps and snatch blocks The shackle s pin is threaded to allow easy re moval Tree Trunk Protector Typi cally made of tough high quality nylon it provides the operator an attachment point for the winch rope to a wide variety of anchor points and objects as well as protect liv ing trees Operating Your Winch WARNING Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook when spooling wire rope in or out Never use as a hoist Never use to move persons Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the wire rope Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or under load Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under load wire rope is in tension or wire rope drum is moving Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep others away during winching Continued 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire e Never winch when there are less than five wraps rope hook and fairlead opening during operation and when spooling Never wrap wire rope back onto itself Always use a choker chain wire choker rope or tree trunk protector on the anchor Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to increase the length of a pull Never atte
126. OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats Automatic Transmission Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Bucket Seats 2 saa rarr eee eee Rear Cupholder Quad Cab If Equipped H Storage Center Storage Compartment 40 20 40 Seat If Equipped Center Storage Compartment Bucket Seats If Equipped Storage And Seats Quad Cab Models Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers If Equipped Bl Rear Window Features 000 172 Rear Window Defroster And Heated Outside Mirrors If Equipped 172 Power Sliding Rear Window It Equipped cech ee oe Rem Sliding Rear Window If Equipped 174 ll Fold Flat Load Floor If Equipped 174 la Pickup Box onana ied en eode 176 H Slide In Campers 1 sco n 178 Camper Applications 178 B Easy Off Tailgate lees 178 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window A Adjusting Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mi
127. OFF ON will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and 4 move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random play Operating Instructions Auxiliary
128. OPERATING 391 WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirem
129. Only the operator should handle the wire rope and immediately Loose or damaged winch installation remote control must be corrected immediately 6 Think safety at all times Always be sure any element which can interfere with safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating winching Continued 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Continued e Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum wire rope and rigging e Inspect for cracks pinches frayed wires or loose connections Replace if damaged e Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar through the rollers Watch and listen to Winch for proper snugness zs s rnm MM Bees OPER OOO 1 Inspect the winch winch mount and wire rope for damage Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or rope shows excessive wear or damage 2 Put on gloves ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 3 Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the 4 Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap Free winch drum rotate the clutch lever on the winch to the winch hook from its anchor point Attach the hook disengage Freespooling conserves battery power strap to the hook if not attached 814a0dd4 Free Spool Hook Strap 5 Pull the wire to the anchor point Pull out enough wire rope to reach your anchor point Be sure to keep a certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted 318 STARTING AND OPERATING and over wrapped when slackened lead
130. RK only after the vehicle has come to standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a a complete stop grounded three wire extension cord e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver s side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Automatic Transmission with Overdrive The gear shift lever display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range the selector is illuminated for night driving The shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering
131. Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator
132. SP is off To turn ESP on again momen tarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP Off is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LOCK or Neutral to 4WD LOW the ESP system will be in this mode WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability ESP Off mode is intended for off highway or off road use only ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time th
133. Sands 304 Traction Control 2 0 eee 334 Trailer Sway Control TSC 345 Trailet TOWNS uu ree a was ase dike d 383 Cooling System Tips 000 396 Hitches 35 0056 ee ux eA eR ee L4 dec 388 Minimum Requirements 390 Mirrors aa ii ae ae 4 eR eR OR RR RR as 85 Trailer and Tongue Weight 389 WHINE creces ce ea BER Rex eR ee 393 Trailer Towing Guide llle 389 Trailer Weight 526 INDEX MM Transaxle Automatic e ad e e Rp ea o Y ORG x Y 12 Transfer Case acca deta aoa RR bas baad 449 Electronically Shifted 264 272 NG orca ea AERA athe ae dads 480 Transmission AutOnmiati iuru atRedercnegUe Bese dni s Ue 255 449 dii ERECTUS 480 Maintenance ren 449 Shif ng erem BI he ereta PEs aere ES 254 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 153 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entty isse9a 9 aes e Ee b exe b nicae 23 Tread Wear Indicators llle 358 Trip Computer s coeur p eqs 146 Tip Odometer ie Re ete Reg 192 199 Tum Signals 2 4 cse en 136 188 465 469 uconnect Hands Free Phone 86 Uniform Tire Quality Grades iss 506 Universal Transmitter eese 153 Variance Compass vss ee bbe ee PEA AS as 152 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading ec Eee wes 351 381 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage a0 oes mee
134. T Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems ee Printed in USA p
135. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Windshield Washers To use the washer push in on the washer knob on the end Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield of the multifunction lever and hold while spray is could lead to an accident You might not see other desired If the washer knob is depressed while in the vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds the windshield during freezing weather warm the after the washer knob is released It will then resume the ome windshield with the defroster before and during intermittent interval previously selected If the washer windshield washer use knob is pushed for a period greater than one second while in the off position the wiper will cycle approxi mately three times after the wash knob is released 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control lever is located on the left side of the steering column just below the multifunction lever Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column Move the steering column up or down as desired and push the lever toward the instrument panel to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Control Lever WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col um
136. a Inc Customer Center 502 In Mexico Contact lees 502 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TIY Service Contract llle lll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only BMOPARS Parts clin Re ee E Reporting Safety Defects In The 50 United States And Washington Du Gis fe etie E bite dde Canada oeste ag we each Aiea WM Publication Order Forms 505 500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Traction Grades www rostntiss tsaa 507 Quality Grades 0 00000 506 Txeadweaf i0s lt cissebiaage 3 uemx ace v 507 Temperature Grades issus 508 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 501 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable Wi
137. accident and you may be seriously injured To lock the front axle move the axle locker switch to FRONT REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked NOTE The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock To unlock the front axle move the axle locker switch to REAR LOCK The FRONT REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the axle is unlocked NOTE The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side loads on the axle Driving slowly while turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the axles To unlock the rear axle move the axle locker switch to AXLE UNLOCK The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear axle is unlocked 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME STABILIZER SWAY BAR SYSTEM POWER WAGON ONLY Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations Due to the use of taller springs this vehicle has an increased ride height of approximately 1 9 in 48 3 mm in the front and 1 5 in 38 1 mm in the rear A major advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect it has on approach departure and break over angles This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar switch located on t
138. ach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the vehicle has window bags they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors if equipped e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag e Window Bags above Side Windows if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel e Interconnecting Wiring e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front Acceleration Sensors 1500 Vehicles Only THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped Driver Seat Track Position Sensor if equipped Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON OFF Switch 2500 3500 Regular Cab Vehicles Only Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light 2500 3500 Regular Cab Vehicles Only How the Airbag System Works The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from information provided by the ORC The ORC will not detect rollover or rear collisions The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions These include all of the items listed ab
139. adlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash the lenses with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing NOTE Do not use abrasive cleaning components sol vents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses Daytime Running Lights Canada Only and Fleet Vehicles The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights On condition until the ignition is turned OFF or the parking brake is applied The lights illuminate at less than 5076 of their normal intensity If a turn signal is activated the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The fog lights are turned on by placing the head light rotary control in the parking light or low beam headlight position and
140. air condition ing off Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the air conditioning compressor is on This is a normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy 81646393 Air Conditioning And Heating 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The mode control at the right of the control panel can be set in any of the 816463c5 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots Recirculation Modes Panel or Bi Level e Select the recirculation modes when the outside air contains smoke odors high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired This feature allows for recir culation of interior air only Air flows through the panel only or through c J 811b86ba both the panel and floor vents depending on the selected mode panel vs bi level NOTE Selecting a Recirculation Mode does not neces sarily consume more fuel than normal A C mode Panel gt e Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel Bi Level J Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and at the floor Floor gt Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel Mix Qt e Outside air flows in equal proportions through the floor an
141. al will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 OCek De AY a gv Bas ELECTRONIC STABILITY WATER IN FUEL REAR a WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULE TURN SIGNALS e DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE PROGRAM INTERMITTENT FAILURE PEDALS SPEED CONTROL roe syste n XX z 40 KB OR C M O e 5 wW e 2 o FUEL REAR WINDOW WNDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING LOW BEAM POWER OUTLEN pate op ra Ei ud ia EE HILL DESCENT wa PATENG INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH CONTROL uns E UMP QOG 1i3 o 8 6 FUEL FILL SIDE ER WINDSHIELD WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOR UGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTLLOCK FLUID LEVEL OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM e m Gy 200
142. ale Pin 3 Ground US S LAC Mo od 057003765 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes en STARTING AND OPERATING 395 WARNING Any work done to the vehicles electrical system or wiring should be performed by a qualified automo tive technician if done improperly it may cause damage to the electrical system wiring and could result in serious or fatal injury Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL or OD OFF range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL or OD OFF range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con ditions will improve performance and extend transmis sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Tow Haul If Equipped To reduce potential for
143. amming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the indicator s starts to flash Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicators begin to flash Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for Rolling Code es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two co
144. and block the front tires If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try using your spare tire by burying it Once you have determined an anchor point hook up the cable ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum and place a floor mat or something else over the strung out cable Placing something over the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks Next place the vehicle in 1st gear and apply a very light throttle as 302 STARTING AND OPERATING EE you power the winch in Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle Do not try to guide the cable into the drum If it starts to bunch up on one end let it You can re spool the cable after wards Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and always stand back while winching WARNING Winch cables are under high tension when in use and can become a projectile if they fail Never stand over or straddle the winch cable Never jerk or overload the winch cable Never stand in front of the vehicle while winching Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious or fatal injury After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After driving off road it is always a good idea to check for damage e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasten
145. and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con nection to tether anchors have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for their older products Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether anchorages one each behind the front center and right seats Quad Cab models have three anchorages one behind each of the rear seats WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside
146. and twist the connec tor counterclockwise 1 4 turn and remove the connector and bulb from the housing ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 2 Pull the bulb straight from the connector Tail Stop Turn and Backup Lights 1 Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheetmetal 3 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing Removing The Two Screws 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 Pull the housing straight out from the body with a 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove quick motion to separate the housing from the body If from the housing not pulled straight locators may be damaged Rotating Bulb Socket From Housing Pulling Housing From Body MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 4 Pull the bulb straight out of socket 5 Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing E Place the two raised blocks past the body Pulling Bulb From Socket Sliding Raised Blocks Past Body 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Center High Mounted Stoplight CHMSL With 2 Separate the connector holding the housing and wir Cargo Light ing harness to the body 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown 3 Turn the desired bulb socket turn and remove the socket and bulb from housing es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 4 Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket Cab Top Clearance Lights If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws from the to
147. anel cupholder tray power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life As a child safety precaution the lighter only operates and or prevent the engine from starting with the ignition switch ON It heats when pushed in and Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the the heating element do not hold the lighter in the battery even more quickly Only use these inter heating position mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery The cigar lighter is located on the instrument panel above and to the left of the ash receiver ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 To access the cupholders pull on the cupholder door handle located on the instrument panel Ash Receiver CUPHOLDERS Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats Automatic Transmission Located in the front center stack of the instrument panel are two adjustable cupholders Cupholder Door Handle Each opening in the cupholder is adjustable and will hold cups an
148. aner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped You can identify if your vehicle has Stain Repel Seat Fabric that makes spills easy to clean reduces odor from spills and reduces static by the presence of a tag on the side of the seat Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care
149. ant Temperature ees 190 Fuel eesec ke ges a APR EE ra 200 OI PresSUfe a eite nitride ien acd aate d Re ae d 190 Speedometer nc cn ee red epe 189 Tachometer sac io8 wae ae ae alge rae alk ges 189 Voltmeter iocis eie e d rra 188 Gear Ranges s esses p ER Op ROS ARR a 255 General Information 18 114 374 Glass Cleaning i cesse ale Red x Red 456 Grocery Bag Retainer 00005 172 Gross Axle Weight Rating 384 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 384 Guide Body Builders 0 00 6 GVWR io cn2h edie ea ge tthe GU ee ded 381 Hands Free Phone uconnect 516 INDEX aaa Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Hazard Warning Flasher Head Restraints Headlights Cleaning High Beam High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Lights On Reminder Heated Mirrors Heated Seats Heater Heater Engine Block High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch Hitches Trailer Towing Hoistitig ence ERR ee dug ce gms 418 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 153 Hood Release 2i RR n mx 130 Hub Caps os je bee d hh b egit oe 414 Ignition dae Ke d esce s o ea eo em ae deoa 12 Key za kde dera dh dose Robe RC wea eae 12 Ignition Key Removal lessse 12 Illuminated Entry 0 i peak eee 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key 2005 15 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 60 61 Inflation Pressure Tires
150. ar phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next
151. ar phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Call by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name
152. arbon Monoxide Warnings STARTING AND OPERATING M ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 E Adding Wiel 2 604 see teen ee Poise REY 379 Towing Requirements 222299 3n 390 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Message 381 Towing Tips i edxRRanee Res RE eoe 395 H Vehicle Loading sees 381 W Snowplow 2 202045 ccidebiediae nA 396 Certification Label 2s mms 381 W Recreational Towing a Laudes Towing uere ERR REX Ensa 383 Pelinel Motesiome FAC ea i ee ear Common Towing Definitions 384 Recednonal Jovang two Whe Pave Models 2 inc cathe Grae Eee ton d RE Trailer Hitch Classification 388 Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Models 2 sedere eer reme Weight Ratings ase 4 eR RE 389 ll Equipment Identification Plate Trailer And Tongue Weight 389 252 STARTING AND OPERATING Se STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second intervals Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Normal Starting Normal starting of eit
153. articles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufac turer s instructions for cleaning e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners if equipped cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perch
154. as a guide for locating lower anchors NOTE For children riding in the front seat of a Regular Cab model refer to the Passenger Airbag ON OFF Switch located in this section Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats Regular Cab Passenger Seat 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Mega Cab Rear Seats Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckl
155. ash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral N button is released ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 e The ignition key must be ON for a transfer case shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar place and no position indicator lights will be on or on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be flashing damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid loss will damage internal parts e Flashing Neutral position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WARNING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE You or others could be injured if you leave the The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the inner surface NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the 5 The following information about your vehicle is dis parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position played on this plate Model Wheelbase Vehicle Identifi disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from cation Number Truck Order Number and code numbers the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move with descriptions of all production and special equip despite the transmission position The parking brake ment on the truck as shipped from the factory should always be applied when the d
156. at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the speed control is on speed can be increased by pressing and holding the ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the RESUME ACCEL button once will result in a speed increase of 1 mph 2 km h Each time the button 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M is tapped speed increases so that tapping the button three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the button is tapped speed decreases For example tapping the button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h To decrease speed while speed control is ON push down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set To Accelerate for Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 ft 610 m or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph 40 km h the speed control will automatically disengage If this hap pens you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed Vehicles may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions To reduce
157. ate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L engine Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the transfer case fluid O O O O 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule mi mi mi L LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 487 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se M A TTS See SEES Ng 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service i 42 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M Change the engine oil and engine oil A Rotate tires N filter J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off r
158. attery is from one to two years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M RKE Transmitter Battery Service 1 With RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade or dime to pry the two halves of the RKE transmit ter apart Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal g RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement 81182c72 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test the RKE transmitter operation NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply see www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine
159. automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL OD OFF feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades 396 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions NOTE Engine power may be temporarily reduced in order to maintain oil and coolant temperatures under extreme trailer tow operating conditions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOWPLOW Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow NOTE Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Dodge Body Builder s Guide See your authorized dealer installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information There are unique electrical sys
160. avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Vehicle Recovery If you drive off road you may encounter a situation where you will need to recover your vehicle Vehicle recovery should always be given consideration before attempting a questionable obstacle You should never go off road driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a situation Having another vehicle with you usually works best for most situations The first thing to do is assess the situation Why are you stuck Are you hung up on something Would it be easier to go forward or to go backward Can you still move the vehicle Is there an anchor point to winch to Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to help Is there high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process Answering these questions will help you determine the best method of recovery If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick ground then rock cycling your vehicle would be the first choice If you have ample room an additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impingement on the surroundings then using a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be taken during the recovery then nothing can do the job better than a winch If you are severely hung up on something you should jack the vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to al
161. be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
162. belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control module Like the airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts If the driver unbuckles the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime will be heard and BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the ignition is cycled driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by fol
163. belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emer gency Locking Mode 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Center Lap Belts The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable WARNING e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down and under the belt in a collision e A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat
164. bs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat be
165. button will clear the fog then adjust temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at or QW and adjust temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging 8159dfbc STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 00 0 252 Normal Starting 00 252 Automatic Transmission 252 If Engine Fails To Start 252 After Starting ce teeta sce ea 254 H Engine Block Heater If Equipped 254 Bl Automatic Transmission 254 Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 255 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case RE ers Transfer Case Position Indicator Light Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions Five Position Switch If Equipped Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case coste eu RES aae EEG 248 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions Four Position Switch If Equipped Shifti
166. button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operating Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition
167. cating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types
168. cations should be ob tained immediately ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Cooling System e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion You or others can be badly burned by hot engine Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If vehicle you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic cap when the radiator is hot testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where 7 applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of th
169. ceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock plunger up or down e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle All doors may be opened with the inside door handle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving without lifting the lock plunger Doors locked before unattended children in a vehicle is dan
170. cellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center seating position have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wea
171. ck Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol 3 After the hours are adjusted press the TUNE AUDIO control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the TUNE AUDIO control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the Rewind Fast Forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the so
172. ck turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS g M Mirrors 2 1 ee 82 WMiuconnect phone If Equipped 86 Inside Day Night Mirror l i 82 Operation xs cagng e ue sens ee Ide aoe 88 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 82 Phone Call Features 1 ee ee ee 96 Outside Mirrors lille 83 uconnect phone Features 99 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 84 Advanced Phone Connectivity 104 Power Mirrors If Equipped 84 Things You Should Know About Your Heated Mirrors If Equipped 85 uconnect phone 2 6 6 2 eee eee 106 Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped 85 General Information 114 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se li Voice Recognition VR System It Equipped i ais S ya r ede Voice Recognition VR System Operation Commands Voice Training B Seats Manual Seat
173. cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FUSES Integrated Power Module The integrated power module is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains car tridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart 8165f5b6 Integrated Power Module ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICL
174. column You must depress the brake pedal to pull the shift lever out of PARK position Brake Interlock System To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the desired DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE SECOND FIRST or PARK or when shifting out of PARK Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever back and forth without first pulling it toward you after you have set it in PARK Make sure it is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 256 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed I
175. conds The radio will pause on each channel for seven seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available mm Storing And Selecting Preset Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM preset stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to pushbutton memory These satellite channel preset stations will not erase any AM or FM preset memory stations Follow the memory preset procedures that apply to your radio Using The PTY Program Type Button If Equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play seven seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a preset memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK
176. ctronic Stability Program 340 Traction Control System 334 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 339 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 142 Electronic Stability Program ESP 197 340 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 264 272 Emergency Brake 0 2 0000 eee 329 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 421 Hazard Warning Flasher 406 JACKING ss ruens oec m ote eo Dd eg 409 Jump Starting ce or tee ea eae aes 419 Tow Hooks 514 INDEX ae TOWING Suck ue oe gam he ah e HP cere ates aR 422 Emission Control System Maintenance 429 482 Engine sacado e eue eee dex 427 Ai Cleaner 4 4 4 00 3 1 pe dore RE does 434 Block Heater llle 254 Break In Recommendations 73 Compartment Identification 427 Coolant Antifreeze 0 0 00 ee 479 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 74 379 Flooded Starting 2 6 5 e560 9 Re 252 Fuel Requirements 0005 478 Oil hak hee ea amp RIDES Boas RUE 431 478 479 Oil Filler Cap sts c9 e eae 432 Oil Selection ird RE 432 478 Oil Synthetic soe e m as 433 Temperature Gauge lille sr isi 190 Equipment Identification Plate 403 Event Data Recorder sss 58 Exhaust Gas Caution 74 179 379 439 Exhaust System swiss ee bese en 74 438 Exterior Lighting
177. current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning Airing Down For Off Road Driving Running lower tire pressure off road can improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly improving its surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form to the ground contour Different terrain tires and vehicles require different tire pressure Hard surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles You will need to experiment to determine what is right for your situation It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it so start high and lower it as required Remem ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on road or at highway conditions Be sure you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road air pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure drive at slower speeds and
178. d noFUSE indicates that the IOD fuse is removed from the Integrated Power Module will display in the odometer NOTE There is also an engine hour function This indicates the total number of hours the engine has been running To display the engine hours perform the follow ing Place the ignition in RUN but do not start the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 engine With the odometer value displayed hold the trip button down for a period of six seconds The odometer will change to trip value first then it will display the engine hour value The engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started CHANGE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following
179. d defroster outlets and the air conditioning may be on Defrost Sq Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and the demister outlets located at the edge of each side of the instrument panel and the air conditioning may be on NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield Blower Control The rotary knob on the left of the o control panel is the blower control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower off turn the knob to the far left position 816463cd UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Temperature Control The rotary knob at the center of the control panel controls the temperature of the interior air You can choose your degree of comfort by rotating the knob The coldest temperature setting 816463c9 S to the extreme left blue region and the warmest setting is to the extreme right red region of the rotation Circulation The cab is designed with features to promote outside air circulation There are grilles in the cab back panel These are air exhausters that provide the means for regular exchange of cab air Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the window glass to help prevent
180. d mugs of various sizes 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To secure the cup place the cup to be held into one of the Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Bucket cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the Seats cup until it is held stable If your vehicle is equipped with bucket seats there are three cupholders located on the front of the center console Cupholders Cupholders Bucket Seat es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Rear Cupholder Quad Cab If Equipped Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup holder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience STORAGE Center Storage Compartment 40 20 40 Seat If Equipped The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the cover Inside there is a power outlet if equipped removable coin holder if equipped and two dividers to configure the storage area into compartments For ex ample compartments can be configured to hold a cellular telephone CDs and miscellaneous items Center Storage Compartment 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation or an accident Only use the center seating
181. day es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 81482f6a Dimmer Control Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar or if the dimmer control is rotated upwards for approximately 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights are left on or turned on when the ignition is turned OFF the headlights will automatically turn off after approximately eight minutes NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlights Parking Lights and Panel Lights xe When the headlight switch is rotated to the first x position the parking lights taillights side marker lights license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on The headlights will turn on when the switch is rotated to the second position 81482f22 Headlight Switch Rotation Your vehicle is equipped with plastic he
182. disarmed 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 15 Shift Lever Indicator Automatic Transmission Only This display indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 16 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odometer display the desired trip odom eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets approximately two seconds Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist messages such as door indicates that a door s may be ajar hood if the hood is open or ajar on vehicles with remote start gASCAP indicates that your gas cap is possibly loose or damaged LoW tirE indicates low tire pressure CHANgE OIL indicates that the engine oil should be change LoWASH low washer fluid ESPOFF in dicates that ESP is turned off an
183. distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may
184. ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Se independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determi
185. ditioning compressor An indicator light on the button shows that the Air Conditioning compressor sodobags 1S On Conditioned air is now directed through the mode outlets selected Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor OFF Recirculation Pushbutton Pushing the Recirculation button al lows interior air to recirculate continu ously in any position except defrost and defrost floor mode for rapid cool down of the interior See Fast Cooldown later in this section 811b86fe Mode Control g The mode control allows you to zu w choose from several patterns of air distribution 045606949 NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both modes Panel Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct the airflow 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Bi Level yr Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and those located on the floor NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Heat Outside air flows primarily through the floor out lets located under the instrument panel
186. e dick This is an indication that the cap is properly e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn tightened on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top If the gas cap is not tightened properly the Malfunction off the fuel tank after filling Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a WARNING portable container that is inside of a vehicle You e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near could be burned Always place gas containers on the the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the ground while filling tank filled e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the MIL to turn on en STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap Message If the vehicle s diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a
187. e Foreign Language Rhythm and Blues Information Information Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalgia Oldies Oldies Personality Personality Public Public Rhythm and Blues Religious Music Religious Music Religious Talk Religious Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Program Type 16 Eo d Soft Rock Soft Rock Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET DIR but ton The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET DIR button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exc
188. e the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash for 30 sec onds Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will run for two seconds and then the Security Alarm will be initiated To exit the alarming mode press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the interior lights on position extreme top position e The Illumi
189. e Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indi
190. e Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total a
191. e You could lose control and have an accident will be found on the face of the driver s door CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 TIRE CHAINS Use Class U chains on 2500 3500 model trucks or other traction aids that meet SAE Type U specifica tions NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Continued CAUTION Continued Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0 5 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower
192. e apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle NOTE The Brake Warning Light will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake is applied You must be sure that the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ME a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift l
193. e press the bottom of the the Off Road mode stabilizer sway bar button To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4HI or 4LO as shown in Four Wheel Drive Operation and press the top of the stabilizer sway bar button to obtain 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to On Road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local service center for assistance SAFE OFF ROAD DRIVING POWER WAGON ONLY Off Road Driving Tips and Vehicle Characteristics Your vehicle has excellent on and off road capabilities These off road capabilities will allow you to explore those wilderness trails where few travel providing a source of exciting and satisfying recreation Before you venture out you should contact your local governmental agency to determine the designated off road vehicle ORV trails or recreation areas You should always tread lightly and only use established roads trails or ORV recreational areas The National Forest Service Bureau of Land Management or local Department of Natural Re sources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails Skid Plates And Underbody Protection Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components of the truck inc
194. e Position Indicator Lights will do the following If all shift conditions are met 1 The current Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will turn OFF 274 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 2 The selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is completed the Transfer Case Posi tion Indicator Light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON If one or more shift conditions are not met 1 The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will continue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the transfer case switch back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer case located in this section of the Owner s Manual The Service 4WD Warning Light monitors the electric shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when power
195. e and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 4WD AUTO Four Wheel Drive Automatic Range This range auto matically engages when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Additional traction for varying road conditions 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slipper
196. e brake linings replace if 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires J Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only towing necessary J Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 H 3 WI 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or ff Schedule 150 Months Maintenance l 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule N A Rotate tires 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil A JJ If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter N engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Rotate tires H J Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter E 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Q Replace the spark plugs 5 7L engine J Lube front drive shaf
197. e combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 14 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib z Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 865 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 354 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNIN
198. e connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system i
199. e ignition switch is turned ON ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal The sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation TSC Trailer Sway Control The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro priate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Section 5 of this manual for more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes TSC is only active in the default ESP On mode TSC can be disabled by pressing the ESP OFF switch and enterin
200. e low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and a do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP The TPMS has been optimized for the original or Traction Control System TCS equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera 27 Transmission Temperature Indicator Automatic Transmissions Only This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip co
201. e tire pressure to rise to approxi mately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire placard pressure value 368 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style After market wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may af
202. e transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired Transfer Case Position Indicator Light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear NOTE If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process then the desired Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will flash continuously while the original Transfer Case Position Indicator Light is ON until all requirements have been met The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and no Transfer Case Position Indica tor Lights will be on or flashing If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer than 21 days refer to the section on Vehicle Storage 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions Four Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is operated by the transfer case switch which is located on the instrument panel 81a4283e Transfer Case Switch Four Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK e Four wheel drive lo
203. e used for almost all driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or ESP Off for specific reasons as noted below ESP OFF Switch ESP Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING In the Partial Off mode the engine torque reduc tion and stability features are desensitized There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable All 4WD vehicles in Auto and 4HI Modes can also
204. eadliner behind the Remote Sound System Controls front row seat Refer to your VES User s Manual for Back View Of Steering Wheel detailed operating instructions 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The center button of the right hand control will allow you to change the mode The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the left side switch will seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third
205. ealer For safety reasons follow all instructions in this impor tant document NOTE When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a vehicle an alternate Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL must be provided EASY OFF TAILGATE Tailgate removal is sometimes necessary for loading and can be easily removed by following these steps 1 Unlatch the tailgate and open it enough so that there is some slack in the support cables 2 Remove the support cables by releasing the locking tang and rotating them away from the box Once the cables are free move to the right side of the tailgate es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 NOTE e Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box e Dual rear wheel pickup models require properly spaced rear clearance lights If such a vehicle is oper ated without a tailgate suitable lights must be 3 installed WARNING To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Cap or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the Tailgate Support Strap Attachment overhanging camper compartment and be free of 3 Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side leaks pivot clears the hanger bracket 4 Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side pivot 5 Remove the tailgate from the vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Wi Instrument Panel Featur
206. ear of the floor console offers a power outlet Center Storage Compartment 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation or an accident Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright In an accident the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about en dangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 Storage and Seats Quad Cab Models Located in the center of the front 40 20 40 seat cushion there is a s
207. eater stopping distances and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers You want to keep a slow constant steady pace The key is to maintain the vehicle s momentum e Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L Low Range if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than neces sary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control e Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use 4L Low Range with a gear low enough to maintain your momentum without shifting If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and
208. ecessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Shut OFF the engine Depress the brake pedal Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL a A C N e 6 Start the engine 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 8 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in DRIVE 10 Shut OFF the engine and place the ignition key in the unlocked OFF position 11 Shift the transmission into PARK 12 Apply the parking brake 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar 14 Release the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK Returning to Normal Operation Manual Shift Transfer Case Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Apply the parking brake 3 Shut OFF the engine 4 Depress the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Shift the transfer case lever into desired position
209. econd time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned off they will extinguish after 15 minutes 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH COMPASS TEMPERATURE MINI TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED This optional overhead console consists of the following e Courtesy Lights e Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer CMTC gt 80f4d0cO Courtesy Lights This overhead console allows you to choose between a compass temperature display and one of four trip con ditions being monitored es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 US M Button Reset Button Use this button to change the display from U S to Use this button to reset the following displays METRIC m n e Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO e Trip Odometer ODO e Elapsed time ET 811d4abc US M Button 811d4ae1 RESET Button 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Global Reset If the RESET button is pressed twice within two seconds while in any of the four displays AVG ECO ODO ET the Global Reset will reset all four displays Step Button Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip conditions 811d4ae5 STEP Button Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Average fuel economy is a running average of the amount of fuel used and the distance the
210. ed Seat Switches After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Press the switch once to select High level heat ay ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel Hood Release Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 2 Reach into the opening beneath the center of the grille CAUTION and push upward on the safety latch to release it before raising the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to 1 QUT close it Use a firm downward push at
211. ed descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low Range with the transmission in 1st gear manually select 1st gear on automatic transmissions and pro ceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured e Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the down hill wheels which increases the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover Make ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable WARNING soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury seve
212. ed seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belt Installing the Child Restraint System WARNING Do not install child restraint systems equipped with LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad Cab model rear seat The LATCH anchorages in this seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi tions only A child may be placed in the rear center seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat belt and child tether anchorage Failure to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook
213. ee wie wee aee 449 480 Shif ng e sdb be re 255 Special Additives locos 452 Axle Fluid ou Rte rakt r rr oS ea YS 448 480 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 448 ee INDEX 511 Bar Stabilizer Sway System 282 Battery irs tRedurse Mee ead ee eee ERES 434 Emergency Starting 0 0000 419 Saving Feature Protection 133 Belts Sate iac eda Savas eed ERR See e 35 75 Body Builders Guide 0000000 6 Body Mechanism Lubrication 437 B Pillar Location 22 21 IRR m 350 Brake Assist System 335 Brake Control System Electronic 333 Brake Fluid z straights dae er e dod etre 447 480 Brake System 42e RERI S RE edes 330 447 Anti Lock ABS 0004 331 333 Plaid Check 55i ses du eigo na eaaa ia 447 Master Cylinder 0 00 00 000 447 Parkifig i eee ee Rp Reb oak 329 Warning Light i RR 194 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 73 Bulb Replacement 00006 465 Bulbs Light s sace aaa vx eR posi snas 76 464 Cab Top Clearance Lights 473 Calibration Compass llle 151 CaM Pel eea uibesenim aee i eeu uade tA 178 Capacities Fluid cs eec xem E eme 478 Caps Filler Oil Engine Lp de E ne do Gs ded 432 Power Steering iex e RR ERROR RS 328 Radiator Coolant Pressure 444 Car Washes sud ccce un ad a pd 453 Carbon Monoxide Warning Ca
214. either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case located in this section Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2H e Four wheel drive high range 4H e Neutral N e Four wheel drive low range 4L en STARTING AND OPERATING 261 This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instru ment cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is appro
215. eld through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and the demister outlets located at the edge of each side of the instrument panel 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Blower Control eomm 8 o 816463cd The rotary knob on the left of the control panel is the blower control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower off turn the knob to the far left posi tion NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control 816463c9 The rotary knob at the center of the control panel controls the temperature of the interior air You can choose your degree of comfort by rotating the knob The coldest temperature setting is to the extreme left blue region and the warmest setting is to the extreme right red region of the rotation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Air Conditioning and Heating If Equipped Air Conditioning Operation To turn on the Air Conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the snowflake button located at the right of the control panel Conditioned air will be directed through the outlets selected by the mode control A light in the snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on m Press the button a second time to turn the
216. elease the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once The Horn Chirp feature is activated when shipped from the assembly plant If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Continue to hold the LOCK button wait at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the PANIC button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps This vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant with the park lamp flash feature activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter 3 Continue to hold the UNLOCK button wait at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the LOCK button Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Using the Panic Alarm To activate the Panic Mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the RKE trans mitte
217. els becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt 418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME circle tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previ ously tightened until final torque is achieved Recom mended torques are shown in the following chart Disc Type Nut Stud Size Torque Torque Wheels Ft Lbs Newton Meters Cone 9 16 18 120 150 160 200 Flanged 9 16 18 130 160 190 220 To Stow The Flat Or Spare WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three or four times It cannot be overtightened P
218. en edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location all help home es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no uconnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo rec
219. eneral Winch Information Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery winch This winch uses the electrical power from the vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc tion By nature a winch is capable of generating very high forces and should be used with care Do not operate the winch without reading and understanding the com plete winch owner s manual Tensioning the Wire Rope The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use Follow the instructions below to tension the rope 1 Un spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on the winch drum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 2 Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point CAUTION Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re quired to tension the wire rope 3 Apply at least 500 Ibs 227 kg of tension to the rope while winding the rope Always use care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the drum CAUTION Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the winch Low Voltage Interrupt Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage drops to a low level The winch will not power in or out for 30 seconds if this device is tripped If the interrupt is tripped the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few mi
220. ent may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation for the proper inspection procedure 392 STARTING AND OPERATING Se When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion for proper tire replacement procedures Replac ing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in exc
221. eption Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations Operation Instructions CD Mode for CD Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e Note This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit
222. ers for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard or they might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake drums and rotors brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for packed material Packed foreign material can cause a wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct the situation WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary Failure to do so may result is serious injury 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ME LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL IF EQUIPPED The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During n
223. ertain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options a
224. es 184 Ram TUCE soan LEEDS EERE IERES 184 Power Wagon iix ce nes xg 185 Mi Instrument Cluster Base 186 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 187 B Instrument Cluster Description 188 H Electronic Digital Clock 201 Clock Setting Procedure 6 000 202 lll Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional uconnect studios Satellite Radio uconnect phone And Video Entertainment Systems VES Capabilities 202 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 203 Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play i s cray actin tete tc e 208 Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio ld ERR 209 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 211 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play lll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio With Optional uconnect studios Satellite Radio And uconnect phone Capability Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operating Instructions CD Mode Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped lll Sales Code REC AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With uconnect gps Navigation Operating Instruct
225. es including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phon
226. ese water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator e Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ME downstream out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the
227. ess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg es STARTING AND OPERATING 393 CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Wherever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size mm stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin brakes when you need them and could have an wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness accident and connector Continued NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 394 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 057003766 4 Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 1 Female Pins 2 M
228. essure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the incline while resuming accelera tion manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is re sponsible for braking the vehicle Continued 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK or using the parking brake it will roll down the incline and could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK with wheels straight 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running the brake applied rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 4 Press ESP button four times within twenty seconds The ESP TCS Indicator Light should appear and dis appear four times 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink se
229. et the parking brake 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 Place the shift lever into PARK On four wheel drive Instructions vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your 6 Block both the front and rear of the vehicle 4 Turn the ignition OFF 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher wheel diagonally opposite the jacking e Always park on a firm level surface as far from position For example if the right front the edge of the roadway as possible before raising wheel is being changed block the left the vehicle rear wheel Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle transmission in PARK a manual transmission in when the vehicle is being jacked REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 3 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove WARNING I Conbnued the ail nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Placement of the Jack e For 2500 3500 4x2 series trucks when changing a front wheel place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of
230. etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the operation of a cellular phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor mance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repo sitioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation
231. ever on the winch to engage NOTE Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M 9 Connect the remote control to the winch control box located behind the front bumper Be careful not to let the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch If you choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle always pass the remote through a window to avoid pinching the cord in the door Always disconnect the remote control when not in use 10 Put wire rope under tension Using the remote con trol switch slowly wind the wire rope until no slack remains Once the wire rope is under tension stand well clear of it and never step over it 81424738 11 Check your anchor Make sure all connections are secured and free of debris before continuing with the winching procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 12 Check wire rope The wire rope should be neatly 13 In certain situations you wound around the spooling drum Improper winding may decide to throw a heavy can cause damage to the wire rope blanket or similar object over oe S the wire rope A heavy blan ket can absorb energy should the wire rope break Place it on the wire rope midway be tween the winch and the an si4gaiog Chor point Do this before the wire rope is put under ten sion Do not approach or move the blanket once tension is applied Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead If it is necessary to move or remove
232. ever out of PARK WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle en STARTING AND OPERATING 331 If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability the remaining system will still func tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal tra
233. f the Radio faceplate uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for sup ported phones es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the sys tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the veh
234. f your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 DRIVE This position provides all forward gears including 3rd gear direct and 4th or 5th gear overdrive see Overdrive Operation Use this range for most city and highway driving SECOND Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable Use it also when climbing long grades and for engine braking when descending moderately steep grades To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h in this range FIRST Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 20 mph 32 km h or less when going downhill To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h in this range NOTE Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle in SECOND or FIRST gear selections in high ambients as torque converter slip ca
235. fect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Description If Equipped WARNING Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure settings if carrying more than two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 pounds 91 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label which is located on the rear face of the driver door Failure to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in an accident causing serious or fatal injury The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition The Tire and Loading Information label defines the recommended front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle when operating
236. fluid level can be expected to fall as operation If replacement is ever necessary install the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas should be conducted mileage and increased emissions r 8e Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this Brake System section for the correct fluid type The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked WARNING when performing under the hood service or immedi e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system boiling point or is unidentified as to specification failure may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a RULL matkand an ADD mark The fluid level must spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the be kept within these two marks Do not add fluid above brake fluid catching fire the FULL mark because leakage may occur at the cap Continued 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from for eign
237. g ESP Partial Off mode It is not active in the ESP Partial Off or ESP Off modes Please refer to the ESP portion of this section for an explanation of the different ESP operating modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway 346 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 read wear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for tempora
238. g Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ME available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine th
239. g Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO AND uconnect phone CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate SEEK p gt MUTE SCAN X PSCAN TIME RW FF 0 OLEE 815eb156 REF Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Push the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is OFF and the ignition is ON MODE Button Radio Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release t
240. g for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Che
241. g service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Front Prop Shaft Lubrication 2500 3500 4X4 Models Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Use MOPAR Type MS 6560 lithium based grease or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the w
242. g the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push a button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player The radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal The radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 MSG or INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while play
243. g wheels to provide optimal forward traction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes The system applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency braking conditions This can help reduce braking dis tances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of BAS you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 336 STARTING AND OPERATING
244. gerous fora closing will remain locked when closed number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch Location If you press the power door lock switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If Equipped If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h Automatic Door Lock Programming This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VE
245. gh the center of the wheel NOTE Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem facing the ground 060505395 Removing the Spare Tire 1 Lower 2 Raise It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to avoid tangling the loose cable ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with WARNING Continued e Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch vehicle only It is not recommended that the jack Tire Changing Procedure be used for service purposes or to lift more than WARNING one wheel at a time e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or You could be crushed Never get any part of your slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Preparations body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to an authorized service center where it can be raised on a lift vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 2 S
246. ghing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Class I Light Duty Class II Medium Duty Class III Heavy Duty Class IV Extra Heavy Duty Fifth Wheel Gooseneck Greater than 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the website address that con tains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on Ratings your bumper or trailer hitch NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com towing e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gr
247. h under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat 3 Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat 4 Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center seat and attach the hooks to the metal ring 5 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and to the anchor directly behind the right seat 6 Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur er s instructions THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Tether Anchorage Points at All Three Seating Positions Mega Cab 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the ES tether strap so that it will reach over the seatback under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat 2 Lift the cover and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal Multiple Child Restraints 1 Inner Anchor Strap Ring s 2 Snap Hook 3 Tether Strap 4 Passenger s Side Rear Child Seat 5 Rear Center Child Seat 6 Driver s Side Rear Child Seat 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to
248. hannels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor s will change from a slow flash to a rapid flash when trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogr
249. he SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning the ignition ON OFF will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display for five seconds Clo
250. he Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all Passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible
251. he instrument panel 052307134 1 On Road 2 Off Road The switch has two positions On Road and Off Road The system is normally in the On Road mode indicated by a solid green light The stabilizer sway bar should remain in the On Road mode during normal driving conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 WARNING the Off Road position The amber indicator light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully discon Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on nected hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This enhances vehicle stability and is n f condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle PPLA A E NEC SEY SOE mE loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to taining control of the vehicle The system monitors disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar Yelucle speen sia will aHempE to reconnect ne must be aligned This alignment may require that the m stabibzer parat specus over 1Bimph 27 kihi This de vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side indicated by a flashing off road light and solid on road light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will attempt to return to To return to the On Road mod
252. he jack drive tube in order to lower the jack 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the ear vehicle only enough to remove the tire Rear Jacking Location All e Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel on 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models On 3500 dual rear wheel models DRW the lug nuts are a two piece assembly with a flat Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M face Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct nut tightness is 135 ft Ibs 183 N m torque for 2500 3500 single rear wheel SRW models and 145 ft Ibs 197 N m for 3500 dual rear wheel models If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station WARNING A loose tire
253. he tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac 89 tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav 800dfab7 ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING 2 METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
254. her a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait five seconds then repeat the starting procedure Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be depressed to shift out of PARK Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key briefly to START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage when the engine is running If Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 CAUTION WARNING Continued To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster 15 seconds before trying again WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
255. hicle Security Light will flash The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle Use of the Sentry Key will disable the alarm Rearming of the System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition To Set the Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Vehicle Security Alarm is arming The Vehicle Security Lightin the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed NOTE If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu ously during vehicle operation have the Vehicle Security Alarm checked by an authorized dealer To Disarm the System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absenc
256. hicle stored for longer than 21 days refer to the section on Vehicle Storage es STARTING AND OPERATING 279 ive LOCKER SYSTEM POWER WAGON CAUTION This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front e Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced and rear differentials These differentials when engaged roads The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the wheels to spin at an equal rate This allows the vehicle to axles are locked on hard surfaced roads maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck The locking front and rear differentials should only stuck and the tires are spinning You can damage be engaged during low speed extreme off road situa drivetrain components Lock the rear axle before tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with attempting situations or navigating terrain which the ground It is not recommended to drive the vehicle could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck with the differentials locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch located on the center console 81628883 Locking Axle Switch The switch has three positions AXLE UNLOCK REAR LOCK and FRONT REAR LOCK Under normal dri
257. ho rized dealer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once and the turn signal left or right will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam High Beam Low Beam 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed 815be820 Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds between cycles to a cycle every two seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km h or less es
258. houlder harness will no longer be restraining you In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries Only recline in a seat when the vehicle is parked Seat Recliner Handle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the event of a rear impact To adjust pull upward on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as practical at least to the level of the ears To lower the head restraint push inward on the button and push down on the head restraint Head Restraints Manual Lumbar Support If Equipped The lumbar control knobs are located on the left side of the driver s seatback and the right side of the passenger s seatback Rotate the lumbar control knobs to increases or decreases the lumbar support 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Seats If Equipped The four way switch is used to move the seat cushion The power seat controls are located on the outboard side forward or backward or to adjust the seat height up or of the front seat cushions Three switches control the seat down movement Power Seat Movement Power Seat Switch The angle or tilting of the seat cushion can be adjusted using the two toggle switches Use the forward switch to raise or lower the front seat cushion Use the rear switch to raise or lower the rear of the seat c
259. hrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance d Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule 14 Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary T Rotate tires LJ Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary T Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 J Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only 4x4 models only 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace
260. icle damage If wide build wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the ing materials are to be frequently carried the floor installation of a support is recommended This will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the WARNING e The pickup box is intended for load carrying pickup box floor If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs 272 kg of material suspended above the wheelhouse sup ports must be installed to transfer the weight of the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may result The use of proper supports will permit loading up to the rated payload Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an accident causing serious or fatal injury purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts Continued 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel housings Place wooden boards across the box from side to side to create separate load compartments in the pickup box There are four tie down cleats bolted to the lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs 450 kg total SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document available from your authorized d
261. icle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone uy for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button t e Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on c
262. icle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance
263. if necessary Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 only Inspect the CV Joints Inspect exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid amp filter s Inspect the transfer case fluid change fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Replace accessory drive belt s OCOC C O C O C O L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only J Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect th
264. if you have a secondary vehicle which is not stuck The tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery Do not use the bumper or any other vehicle component as an attachment point Using tow straps requires coordination between the two drivers Good communication and line of sight are required for a safe recovery First connect the tow strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery If necessary join two tow straps together using a 1 1 2 inch hard wood dowel This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks Next have the tow vehicle backup leaving two to three feet worth of slack in the strap Then the tow vehicle using light throttle should accelerate tightening the strap providing the pulling force needed to free the vehicle The vehicle being recovered should assist in the recov ery at the time of the snap by slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle After the vehicle becomes free the driver of the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle without using the brakes once signaled by the other driver This sequence is important to avoid having the recov ered vehicle hit the pulling
265. ifted transfer case and is operated by the transfer case switch which is located on the instrument panel 81a42c06 Transfer Case Switch Five Position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 This electronically shifted transfer case provides five mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive automatic range AWD AUTO e Four wheel drive lock range 4WD LOCK e Four wheel drive low range 4WD LOW e Neutral N This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD or four wheel drive position AWD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions dry hard surfaced roads Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD For variable driving conditions the 4WD AUTO mode can be used In this mode the front axle is engaged but the vehicle s power is sent to the rear wheels Four wheel drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction Because the front axle is en gaged this mode will result in lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode When additional traction is required the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for specific shift ing instructions
266. ifting oc e Ifthe transmission temperature gets extremely hot the curs press the TOW HAUL O D OFF button once to transmission will automatically select the most desir select TOW HAUL able gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illu minate and the transmission may downshift out of es STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Tow Haul O D Off Switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode 5th gear if equipped is disabled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified Shifts into Overdrive 4th gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to 3rd gear are performed for improved braking when driving conditions warrant Pressing the TOW HAUL O D OFF button a second time to select O D OFF will disable 4th and 5th gear completely which should elimi nate any excessive transmission shifting The TOW HAUL or O D OFF light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a third time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL or O D OFF modes are desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fue
267. ight line from the winch to the object being pulled This minimizes the wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope A snatch block secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable you to change your pulling direction while still allowing the wire rope to be at 90 to wind properly onto the spooling drum Increasing Pulling Power In some cases you may find yourself needing more pulling power The use of snatch blocks increases me chanical advantage and that increases your pulling power ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Double Line 814a4734 Because pulling power decreases with the number of layers of wire rope on the winch drum you can use a snatch block to double line out more wire rope This decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum and increases pulling power Start by feeding out enough wire rope to free the winch hook Attach the hook to your vehicle s frame tow hook and run the wire rope through a snatch block Disengage the clutch and using the snatch block pull out enough wire to reach your anchor point Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit Secure to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain Attach the clevis shackle Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap chain being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good
268. ight or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RND PTY Button Program Type Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Program Type 16 c m No program type or un None Adult Hits Adult Hits Alert Alert Alert Alert Classical Classical Classic Rock Classic Rock College College Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Country Country Emergency Test Emergency Test Foreign Languag
269. ility Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has multiple operating modes depend ing on vehicle type Two Wheel Drive 2WD or Four Wheel Drive 4WD Four wheel drive vehicles may be equipped with either a four mode position 2WD 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW Neutral transfer case or a five mode position 2WD 4WD AUTO AWD LOCK 4WD LOW Neutral transfer case If you have a four wheel drive vehicle and want to determine which transfer case is on your vehicle and how to operate it refer to the Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section All 2WD vehicles and 4WD vehicles in 2WD AUTO or 4HI Modes can choose the following ESP operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 2WD AUTO 4HI Modes and in 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4WD LO or Neutral back to AWD LOCK or 342 STARTING AND OPERATING M AUTO the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should b
270. im iis Ro cR Use 9 8 9 SUPCR CR UR ELAD e 6 8 C8 S own 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ce cccecccccccccccceccce 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece cece mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece cece ccc eccceccrecccvece 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc ccc cc cece cere were eer hh e ht e WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES 2 ccc cece cece cece cere cere cece hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443593945999 9359949 v 9e vy STE OCTET OTAGO E 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cece ccc ccc crc cc hee s tn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE cece cece cece cece reece reece eecececes 10 INDEX 4 huma HER E Sires E HEU A RR e o9 Eo 8 103 BNE i Salers Std co d Roe gus teras INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction eese 4 WVanConversions Campers lisse 6 E How To Use This Manual 4 Vehicle Identification Number 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 6 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manu
271. in are safe from water ingestion This vehicle has high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of water without stopping 24 inches deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph 16 km h and a pool of water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph 8 km h both with an entrance ramp angle of 1 3 degrees CAUTION The door sill height is 25 inches Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simulta neous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving Front and Rear Shown Differential Height E When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects 8153a5bc 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden
272. in the Max Load condition A Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label is also available defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when operating in the Light Load condition When the tire light load inflation switch LED is ON the TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure cold low inflation warning thresholds Tire Light Load Inflation Switch 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation If Equipped e This vehicle may have different recommended tire pressure values between the front and rear tires as shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label It is also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appro priate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle Max Load condition e The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver to change between the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold and the light load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold depending on the vehicle s load condition Refer to the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label for the vehicle s Light Load inflation pressures and Tire and Loading Information label for the vehicle s Max Load inflation pressures SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION FOR LIGHT LOAD AND MAX LOAD CONDITIONS LIGHT LOAD DEFINITION OCCUPANTS 150 LBS EACH PLUS 200 LBS CARGO MAX LOAD DEFINITION AS DEFINED ON DRIVERS SIDE
273. indshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reser voir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engi
274. ing down the vehicle if the Service 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the WARNING front or rear wheels are spinning as this can cause damage to driveline components You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends brake should always be applied when the driver is on tires of equal size type and circumference on each not in the vehicle wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Se For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode pos
275. ing turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 34 Oil Pressure Warning Light Qe This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK The clock and radio each use the display panel built into the radio A digital readout shows the frequency and or time in hours and minutes depending on your radio model whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position When the ignition switch is in the OFF position or when the radio frequency is being displayed time keeping is accurately maintained On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location of the time and frequency on the display On the REF only one of the two time or frequency is displayed at a time 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and
276. ing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward through the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure mm Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Bject Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the uconnect studios Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operatin
277. ing the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tionin
278. ing to wire rope damage To prevent losing the end hold the hook strap while you work 8149d10f Tree Trunk Protector 814a0dd8 CAUTION 6 Secure to the anchor point Once you have established Always be certain the anchor you select will with your anchor point secure the tree trunk protector or stand the load choker chain around the object ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 NOTE How to choose an anchor point A secure anchor is critical to winching operations An anchor must be strong enough to hold while winching Natural an chors include trees stumps and rocks Hook the cable as low as possible If no natural anchors are available when recovering another vehicle your vehicle becomes the anchor point In this case be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL apply the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your vehicle from moving Ideally you ll want an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the vehicle will move This allows the wire rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum An anchor point as far away as possible will provide the winch with its greatest pulling power 7 Attach the Clevis D shackle and Tree Trunk Protector Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain and through the hook loop being careful not to over tighten tighten and back off 1 2 turn 8149d116 Clevis D Shackles 8 Lock the clutch Lock the winch drum by rotating the clutch l
279. ing wheel bring the en STARTING AND OPERATING 291 vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using a Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing a Ravine Gully Ditch Washout or Rut When crossing a ravine gully
280. interior fogging of the glass They are located in the extreme outside upper 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M edges of the instrument panel The demisters also pro vide extra air ducts for circulation They are in operation whenever the Floor Mix or Defrost modes are in use To remove frost from the side windows it is best to use the full defrost mode NOTE When you turn off the engine you may hear a hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of time This is a normal condition that occurs if the air conditioning system has been on It is not an indication of a problem with the air conditioning system Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature Control If Equipped With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System each front seat occupant can independently control the tem perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle 8164638f Dual Zone Control Head Air Conditioning and Heating Operation To turn on the Air Conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the snowflake button located on the control panel Conditioned air will be directed through the outlets selected by the mode control A light in the snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on Press the button a second time to turn the air condition ing off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 A C Pushbutton With the fan control in the ON posi tion pushing the A C button turns on the air con
281. ion the Seat 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position 2 Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor 3 3 Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor WARNING Do not drive with the load floor in the up position When stopping fast or in an accident the load floor could move to the down position causing serious Load Floor In Open Position injury 3 Reverse the procedure to store the load floor 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE PICKUP BOX The pickup box has many features designed for utility and convenience Load Floor Securing Straps 4 Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle Pick Up Box Features 1 Upper Load Floor Indents 2 Bulk Head Dividers 3 Cleats es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING Continued e Care should always be exercised when operating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo Vehicle speeds NOTE If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the pickup box you must use Mopar toolbox brackets available from your authorized dealer You can carry wide building materials sheets of ply may need to be reduced Severe turns or rough wood etc by building a raised load floor Place lumber roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo across the box in the indentations provided above the that may result in veh
282. ions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped REC Setting The Clock Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped System Activation Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode In REF RAQ And RAK Radios Selecting A Channel Storing And Selecting Preset Channels ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 Using The PTY Program Type Button E CD DVD Maintenance 232 a deihoe e pata bens Pede Sape 229 E Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 233 PIS DUIS bea ioeas cua cies 23 E Climate Controls eee 234 PTY ButtonSeek ena da Ke eee 230 Heater Only If Equipped 05 234 Satelite Antenna wwe ee 230 Air Conditioning And Heating Reception Quality 00 230 lf Equipped 24 04 5422 24 420 PER Ed H Video Entertainment System VES Air Conditioning With Dual Zone It Equipped essc dae emen 231 Temperature Control If Equipped 240 ll Remote Sound System Controls Operating Tips sexi e ex x4 E63 244 It Equipped ze genre 231 Operating Tips Chart scene ees 246 Radio Operation esses 232 CD Player xe RR RR E RR 232 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES RAM TRUCK
283. is normal The ABS conducts a low speed selftest at about 10 mph 16 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 10 mph 16 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation This is normal When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system and is normal Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning ABS Warning Light The ABS includes an amber warning light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency
284. itch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sunroof Maintenance There is an additional power outlet inside the center Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean console of vehicle s equipped with 40 20 40 or bucket the glass panel front seats Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary electrica
285. ition see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maxi mum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again es STARTING AND OPERATING
286. iver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4H Four Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section 4L Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h es STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case Manual Transfer Case Shifter 2H 4H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 2H or 4H amp 4L With
287. k the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light located in the instrument cluster will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the STARTING AND OPERATING 373 ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat provid ing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that affects ra dio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 6 Loss of communication with the trigger modules or tire pressure monitoring sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a non matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 This spare tire does not have a tire
288. l The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to ensure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping Dual wheel models require a special heavy duty lug nut tightening adapter included with the vehicle to cor rectly tighten the lug nuts Also when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels use a proper vehicle lifting device NOTE When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear wheel end combination the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared If there is a significant difference the larger tire should be installed in a front location The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows 060505400 Tightening Pattern 1 Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a snug fit WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417 2 Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table Go through the sequence a second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved Retighten to specifications at 100 miles 160 km and after 500 miles 800 km It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the whe
289. l economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second gear the clutch automatically disengages NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL O D OFF button when the transmission is sufficiently warm will dem onstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Four wheel drive trucks are equipped with
290. l power outlet can provide power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The power outlet is located in the instrument panel below and to the right of the climate control panel A cap is attached to the outlet base indicating Power Outlet 12 Volt 20 A 4 ST Front Power Outlet es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 There is also a power outlet located on the rear of the center console if equipped with bucket seats 034607142 Rear Power Outlet The power outlet s has have a fused direct feed from the battery so it they receive power whether the ignition is ON or OFF All accessories connected to this these power outlet s should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge NOTE If desired all of the power outlets can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition switch in the ON position only WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER The removable ash receiver is located in the instrument e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw p
291. l see on the User Defined Time display the number of hours you have increased the clock by 3 To decrease the clock by one hour use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour 4 To increase the clock by minutes make sure MIN is highlighted and press ENTER Press ENTER again to increase the clock by another minute 5 To decrease the clock by minutes use the Select Encoder to highlight the sign Press ENTER Press ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute 6 Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode Press ENTER to save your changes If you press CAN CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in
292. lation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other t
293. ld s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If
294. ld ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your a abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision injury And a belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Removing Slack from Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3
295. le to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle Improperly secured cargo can fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle causing serious injury or possible death Secure cargo with a cargo tie down using the D rings provided on the back of the seats and the slotted cutouts in the rear storage bin lid Securing Cargo 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The rear seat will drop and move forward in 2 Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward kneel mode qe To fold either rear seat flat 1 Lift the handle located on the outboard side of the seat Kneel Mode 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright position Be sure the seat is locked in place Kneel Mode Handle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into ah position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for front heated seats are located in the instrument panel under the climate controls Heat
296. less Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checkin
297. light Halogen Front Park and Turn Lights CAUTION This is a halogen bulb Avoid touching the glass with your fingers Reduced bulb life will result 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the two bolts from the front of the headlight housing Front Headlight Housing Bolts 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Remove the plug from the inner fender well and remove the nut through the access hole Rear Headlight Housing Nut Access 4 Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to Inner Fender Plug disconnect the electrical connectors NOTE For easier removal pull the headlight assembly straight forward applying the greatest amount of force to the outer edge of the headlight assembly ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 81906efb Headlight Removal Bulb Removal Lm 5 Unlock and pull the connector straight from the base of the headlight halogen bulb 6 Twist the connector on the side marker turn signal park light bulb 1 4 turn and remove the connector and bulb from housing 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Remove the housing from vehicle with the headlight halogen bulb in housing 8 Twist the headlight halogen bulb Y4 turn and remove the headlight bulb from the housing 9 Replace headlight or side marker turn signal park light bulb Do not touch the headlight halogen bulb 10 Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing Fog Lights 1 Reach under the vehicle unlock
298. llowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the
299. load inflation pressure cold values as indicated for the Light Load condition as defined on the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear face of the driver door Using an accurate tire pressure gauge re check the tire pressures for the light load inflation pressure cold value WARNING It is the driver s responsibility to change to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold condition when not driving in the light load condition as defined as two occupants 150 Ibs 68 kg each plus 200 pounds 91 kg of cargo The vehicle Light Load Definition is found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label lo cated on the rear face of the driver door Failure to do so may cause you to lose control resulting in an accident causing serious or fatal injury To switch back to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold press the tire light load inflation switch It is not necessary to first fill the tires to 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ME the max load inflation pressure cold values to switch the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning threshold If after pressing the tire light load inflation switch and tire pressures are below the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds the TPMS low pressure warning telltale light located in the instrument cluster will turn ON and a chime will so
300. load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they re commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required de
301. lorate Enhanced Accident Response System If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlock automatically In addition approximately five seconds after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will light until the ignition switch is turned off Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in an impact While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the airbag control mod ule may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder p
302. low the vehicle to roll off the object without causing further damage This should be tried before attempting any recovery method CAUTION Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle without first clearing the object may result in additional under body damage e Rock Cycling Your Vehicle Rock cycling your ve hicle is one of the easiest fastest and most commonly used methods This simply involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE while applying throttle after each shift During this process for addi tional traction try turning your steering wheel quickly back and forth no more than a 1 4 turn If you are stuck in mud sand or snow try spinning your tires during this process to clean the debris from the tread and improve the traction You want to create a rocking motion with the vehicle This helps build vehicle momentum which hopefully gets you out Remember to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the shift If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free stop and try another method of recovery Continuous rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the environment 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an excessive high speed Do not spin your tires faster than an indicated 35 mph 56 km h e Using the Tow Hooks With a Tow Strap Tow straps are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from minor situations
303. lowing these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there i
304. lts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap portion For further information refer to www seatcheck org WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING Continued e A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat or in the front seat if the passenger s front airbag is OFF If the airbag is left ON a rearward facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your chi
305. luding the fuel tank transfer case and steering damper In addition this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members and fore aft rails This addi tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off road situations that would be considered im passable by a normal truck ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Ramp Travel Index RTD The ramp travel index is the distance in inches that you can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20 degree ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground This distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by 1 000 is the RTI This vehicle has an RTI of 655 which means you can articulate one front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground High Mobility Characteristics This vehicle has high off road mobility characteristics with an approach angle A 35 degrees a break over angle B 25 5 degrees a running ground clearance C 14 5 inches a departure angle D 26 5 degrees an axle to ground clearance E 8 4 inches front E 8 25 rear and has a ramp travel index with the smart bar in off road mode of 655 Also it has a grade ability of a 60 31 degree slope 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 816822b9 Angles A B C and D ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 Water Fording Characteristics Water fording characteristic is the vehicle s ability to cross a body of still water where the powertrain and drivetra
306. lug wrench to pry the caps off The wheel skin can now be removed CAUTION e Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur Continued CAUTION Continued e The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lugnut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel 416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 8 Stud Dual Rear Wheels Dual wheels are flat mounted and center piloted The lug nuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being rotated or replaced clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer 060505399 Oiling Location Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels Align these slots when assem bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner whee
307. mall for a rear facing infant restraint or because the infant has a medical condition which makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the infant or chest on the dashboard instrument panel or windshield in a crash This may result in serious injury or death To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag 2500 3500 Regular is a child age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat Cab Vehicles Only because there is no rear seat because there is no rear seat position available or because the child has a medical condition which makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the child Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag ON OFF Switch push the key in and turn clockwise and remove the key from the switch This will shut off the passenger side airbag The OFF light near the switch will illuminate e has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position inflation deployment a greater risk for the passenger than the risk of hitting the dashboard instrument panel or windshield in a crash 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Turn On the Passenger Airbag 2500 3500 Regular Cab Vehicles Only Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag ON OFF Switch push the key in and turn counterclockwise and remove the key from the switch This will turn ON the passenger airbag The OFF light near the switch will be off when the ignition switch is turned to the
308. matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level position The fluid level should be even with the bottom of the fill hole for the manufacturer s C205F HD front axles The fluid level should be 5 8 in 16 mm below the fill hole on 9 1 4 in manufacturer s rear axles For all 2500 3500 Model axles the fluid level should be 1 4 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole on the 9 25 in front and 3 4 in 1 4 in 19 mm 6 4 mm on 10 5 in rear axles The 11 5 in rear axle level should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the fill hole Drain and Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components
309. ment imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tool
310. mmedi ate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle s diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition
311. mpt to tow a vehicle with the recovery strap attached directly to the winch hook Never use bungee straps that develop tremen dous and potentially dangerous amounts of force when stretched Always disconnect the remote control when not in use Continued of wire rope around the winch drum Always pass remote control through a window to avoid pinching lead in door then using remote inside a vehicle Never leave the remote control plugged into the winch while free spooling rigging or sitting idle Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding proper winch usage may result in severe injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 General Information Vehicle Recovery Using the Winch Practice using your winch before you get stuck Some key points to remember when using your winch are 1 Always take your time to assess the situation and plan e Always Know Your Winch Take the time to fully your pull carefully read and understand the included Installation and Operations Guide and Basic Guide to Winching Techniques in order to understand your winch 3 Use the right equipment for the situation and the winching operation Always inspect winch installation and wire rope 2 Always take your time when using a winch 4 Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope condition before operating the winch Frayed kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced 5
312. n you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED Adjustment The adjustable accelerator and brake pedal allow the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to the steering wheel and pedals 1 Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10 in 254 mm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts EN 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch located to the left of the steering column near the parking brake release in the direction you desire to move the pedals NOTE The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is set Adjustable Pedals Switch 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control system takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The controls are mounted on the steering wheel 032205246 Electronic Speed Controls 1 Resume
313. n Menu to switch to the main menu 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the VR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Language Italian e Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial e Voice Training es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature ma
314. n an emergency it should be replaced with the Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine LEN coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Continued Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator 44 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as
315. n be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you 3 wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entri
316. n during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path
317. n impose significant additional heat load on the cooling system Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth if equipped speed Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from DRIVE to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL O D OFF switch has not been activated 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e transmission has reached normal operating Overdrive until the transmission cools down After temperature cool down the transmission will resume normal NOTE operation e Ifthe vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at automatically select the most desirable gear for opera vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h tion at this temperature Normal operation will re When To Use TOW HAUL and O D OFF sume when the transmission fluid temperature has 1 1 Modes risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under iu UE H Pre When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a Torque Converter Clutch in this section h ane Ms eavy load etc and frequent transmission sh
318. nated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED The system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE trans mitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 8163e6a8 Three Button RKE Transmitter ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate the parking lights will flash on twice and if installed the cargo lamp will turn on for 30 seconds The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or the driver s door only upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on your RKE trans mitter 3 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four seconds but no longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 4 Release both buttons at the same time 5 This will allow you to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button 6 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors Press and r
319. nce adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible
320. nd the NEUTRAL light comes on release the NEUTRAL button 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement en STARTING AND OPERATING 401 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in DRIVE 12 Shut the engine OFF and place ignition key in the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift the transmission into PARK 14 Apply the parking brake 15 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar 16 Release the parking brake NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL selection button and must continue to be met until the four seconds elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met prior to depressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the four second timer then the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released e The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key in not ON the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK wi
321. ndicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will
322. ndition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 26 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If Equipped 28 OdometerlTrip Odometer Button If this indicator light flashes during accelera Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the tion apply as little throttle as possible While trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your trip odometer reading when in trip mode 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 29 Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 30 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to 1 16 tank the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead console module CMTC it is possible for DTE to display LO FUEL before the low fuel warning light turns on in the instrument cluster This could occur because the low fuel warning i
323. nditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power sunroof to operate for approximately ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or a front door is opened 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to o
324. ndow bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with window bags they are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions Continued 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with window bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the window bags Along with the seat belts
325. nds towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground Speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km If the vehicle is to be towed faster than 30 mph 50 km h or more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground It may also be towed on a flatbed or with the 6 front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a dolly CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe damage to the transmission MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 5 7L ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Progra apan enhi eee b rer ll Replacement Parts E Dealer Service Bl Maintenance Procedures Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Engine Air Cleaner Filter 434 Maintenance Free Battery 434 Air Conditioner Maintenance 435 Front Prop Shaft Lubrication 2500 350
326. ne has warmed operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield MOPAR All Weather Windshield Washer Solution used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the cataly
327. ne is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069
328. ne what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object en STARTING AND OPERATING 293 CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle e Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel confident then change trans mission into a lower gear shift the transfer case into 4L Low and proceed with caution You should use first gear and
329. ng Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ll Axle Locker System Power Wagon Only Wi Stabilizer Sway Bar System Power Wagon e m ll Safe Off Road Driving Power Wagon Only iaa RR LR ea Pn Reb a ICE os Off Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics Driving In Snow Mud And Sand Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points Hill Climbing Driving Through Water Airing Down For Off Road Driving Vehicle Recovery After Driving Off Road Bl Limited Slip Differential If Equipped E Driving On Slippery Surfaces Bl Driving Through Water Flowing Rising Water Shallow Standing Water ll Driving Off Road Ram Truck Only lll Winch Usage If Equipped Power Wagon Only iis eec eder LU PR PPS Things To Know Before Using Your Winch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Understanding The Features Of Your Traction Control System TCS 334 UD MES NAH 310 ere em BAS ee ie Winch Accessories ee eee 312 Hill Siart Assist HSA S22 nc ocesae odes 336 PENE AOE NE eignen 25 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 339 Rigas TEMNE saapaid 2e Electronic Stability Program ESP 340 H Power Steering ese 3
330. nge your vehicles oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Odometer Trip Odometer under In strument Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery clean and tighten the terminals as required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as
331. ns for any rapid or ON OFF Road type tires mounted on the rear do not use unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being a front to back rotation pattern Instead rotate your tires performed side to side at the recommended intervals 055703771 STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Dual Rear Wheels CAUTION ES 3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc tion of rotation This is to accommodate the asym E metrical design tread pattern of the ON OFF road tire and the use of Outline White Letter OWL tires e When replacing a flat the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the E tire on the wheel relative to the tire wheel position on the truck For example if the spare is used to 055705948 din replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set inward That way the tread design of asymmetrical To check if tires are even lay a straight edge across all tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will four tires The straight edge should touch all the tires maintain proper position 366 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
332. nting the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar TIRE ORIGINAL TIRE Sizl P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ci 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loadin
333. num bers will display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or five minutes have passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access with REC Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual With the ignition in the ACC position and the radio off press the CD Eject and SET buttons simultaneously until the 12 digits of the ESN SID appear on the screen Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode in REF RAQ And RAK Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display ACD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Selecting Satellite Mode RAQ and RAK Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting A Channel Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for the next channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every seven se
334. nutes to allow the vehicle charging system to recover before continuing to winch Winch Motor Thermal Protection Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device in the motor If the winch is operated for an excessive duration the device may interrupt motor function to protect the winch motor During this time the winch will power out but will not power in Allow the winch motor to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch The winch will resume normal function once the motor cools 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Understanding The Features Of Your Winch 814a6beb Winch Components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 1 Motor The winch motor is powered by the vehicle charging system and features a thermal protection switch that automatically stops motor function in the power in direction if the motor gets too hot 2 Remote Socket The remote socket allows the remote control to be attached to the control pack to allow the winch to function 3 Winch Drum with Integral Brake The winch drum allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and transmits force to the wire rope The winch is equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped 4 3 Stage Planetary Gear Set Provides balance between speed and pulling power 5 Wire Rope The wire rope allows the winch to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force 6 Clutch Lever The clutch lever allows
335. o a full sweep when the ignition key is cycled to RUN This is a normal condition When the vehicle is shipped from the factory the IOD fuse is in the up or extracted position If the radio interior lamps keyless entry or other features do not work with the key OFF check the position of the fuse or check to see if the fuse is blown to ensure that it is fully seated When the IOD fuse is extracted the instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis play NO FUSE 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Overhead Console Lights TS 212 2 Dome Light 3 5 ca a kw RO bk eque es d 7679 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No PackUp e ira Gish ae toos E Sibi iuris 3057 Center High Mounted Stop Light 912 bog Light 3 2e thee Vela ade ER 9006LL Headlight Halogen H13 Side Marker Park amp Turn Signal 3157NAK Rear License Plate Light oscari reteni ni ee es 168 Rear Cargo Lig ccs sock coche tva Ae pee tes 912 Tail amp Stop ss ee eme ges 3057 Cab Clearance Lights s cocs cieri tiri cerpas 168 Dual Rear Wheel Sidemarker Light 168 Dual Rear Wheel Tailgate ID Lights 3 168 es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 BULB REPLACEMENT Head
336. o download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the US government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable light status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable e Impact acceleration and angle Seat belt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control statu
337. oad conditions Inspect the ME Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary IE 2 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 2 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 4x4 models only J Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary ube front drive shaft fitting x4 models only Lube fi drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models onl 1 Inspect the CV Joints E Inspect exhaust system D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only J Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCCO O C ovo Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 5 7L engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Lube front drive shaft fitting
338. of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instruc tions below See your authorized dealer for help if necessary ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center Front Seat Regular Cab All Seats 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seatback under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat 2 Lift the cover if so equipped and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions Regular Cab with Any Bench Seat 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence Quad Cab Rear Seats 1 Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat The tether strap may be retained with an elastic band Accessibility to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat cushion to the up position Remove the elastic before use 2 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reac
339. off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped The power sliding rear window switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Press the right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side of the switch to close the glass Power Sliding Rear Window Switch 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Unfolding the Load Floor A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window 1 Lift the 60 40 seat cushion s to the upward position FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR IF EQUIPPED Quad Cab models with a 60 40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor WARNING Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping rapid acceleration or sharp turns Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants Unfolding The Load Floor resulting in serious or fatal injury es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 2 Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under the load floor unfolds into posit
340. on book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac turer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to www dodgebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your authorized dealer ee INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the a left front corner of the instrument panel visible through VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window WARNING on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death Vehicle Identification Number THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS
341. oor does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the c
342. or coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter With disc brakes the
343. or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP The ESP system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the e tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the en STARTING AND OPERATING 341 accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING e ESP Electronic Stab
344. order NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 When you press the VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When
345. ormal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slip pery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow dow
346. osition it to the opposite end of the drum which will free up space for continued always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum oe winching rotation decal on the winch As you power in make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the 16 Secure vehicle Once recovery of the vehicle s is drum This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw complete be sure to secure the vehicle s brakes and put ing into the inner wraps binding and damaging the the transmission in PARK Release tension in the wire wire rope Avoid shock loads by using the control rope switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum This stack can become 17 Disconnect the wire rope and disconnect from the anchor 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 18 Rewind the wire rope The person handling the wire rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through the hand control the winch at all times 81424738 WARNING To prevent serious injury NEVER put your fingers inside the hook area as you are powering in NOTE How to spool under no load Arrange the remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and evenly layered Tighten and straighten the
347. oss Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 057003767 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings ee STARTING AND
348. ough too deep of water Water can cause first The key to any crossing is low and slow You want permanent damage to engine driveline or other to use 1st gear in 4L Low Range and proceed very vehicle components and your brakes will be less slowly with a constant slow speed 3 5 mph 5 8 km h effective once wet and or muddy maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After e Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle approach any type of water you need to determine if differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids you can cross it safely and responsibly If necessary get for signs of water ingestion out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom con ditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters Th
349. ous engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for sev eral minutes and then the electrical system and volt meter needle will stabilize 3 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 Tachometer The Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer at high RPM for extended periods Engine damage may occur 5 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for seven seconds as a bulb check when the ignition N switch is first turned ON If the light is not on UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 6 High Beam Indicator HD This indicator shows that headlights are on high beam 7 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will
350. ove except the steering wheel and column and knee bolsters If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light if equipped an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front pas senger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD indicator light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags The PAD light will illuminate when the passenger frontal airbag has been turned off by using the manual ON OFF switch
351. p of the light e Outside Bulbs Cargo Lights e Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Light 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Rotate the socket turn and pull it from the light 3 Pull the bulb straight from it s socket and replace assembly B ecdc b ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 Tailgate ID Lights Dual Rear Wheels If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws and housing and access the bulb sockets from the rear 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Turn the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise to access the Rear Light Bar ID Marker Dual Rear Wheel If bulb Equipped 1 Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access to the bulb sockets 3 Pull the bulb straight out from socket 817c64e7 4 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing 2 Turn the socket turn counterclockwise to access the bulb ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 3 Pull the bulb straight out from the socket 1 Push rearward on the side marker light assembly 4 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and 2 Pull the entire assembly from the fender housing 8 3 Turn the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove Side Marker Lights Dual Rear Wheels from assembly to access the bulb 4 Pull the bulb straight out from socket 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and housing 4
352. pending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability brak ing performance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information 057003770 EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 057003769 057003768 EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Fifth Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed Connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 lbs 907 kg without added equipment or alter ations to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers wei
353. perate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Open Sunroof Express Mode Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature causing the sunroof to open automatically During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the sw
354. portant to 42 30 Amp Diesel PCM Diesel use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating Pink Only The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we recommend that you take the following steps to mini mize the drain on your vehicle s battery Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse located in the Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment The IOD cavity includes a snap in re tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cables from both batteries Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NOTE e When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully seated the gauges in the instrument cluster will d
355. positions and the brake pedal is depressed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that
356. procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three mm times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 17 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 18 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of tr an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs
357. prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performa
358. pushing in the head light rotary control An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam headlights are activated NOTE The fog lights will only operate when the parking lights or low beam headlights are on Cargo Light If Equipped The cargo lights are turned on by pressing the cargo button The interior lights will also turn on when the cargo lights are on The cargo lights will also turn ON for approximately 30 seconds as part of the Illuminated Entry feature when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 814830fd Cargo Light Switch 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever located on the left side of the steering column is used to activate the turn signals and high beams headlights Turn Signals Move the lever up or down to signal a right hand or left hand turn The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes to indicate the direction of the turn and proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system the arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate If an indicator Turn Signal Lever fails to light when the lever is moved see your aut
359. r TUNE Control CD Mode for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may
360. r associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM
361. r humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended For proper coolant type refer to Recommended Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan
362. r once When the Panic Mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlights and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To cancel the Panic Mode press and release the PANIC button on the transmitter a second time after five sec onds Panic Mode will automatically cancel after three minutes or if the vehicle is started and exceeds 15 mph 24 km h During the Panic Mode the door locks and RKE systems will function normally Panic Mode will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System on vehicles so equipped ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Programming Additional RKE Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Programming under Sentry Key in this section If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 2 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in RKE transmitter The expected life of the b
363. r successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellul
364. r than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power source 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles place the automatic transmission in PARK and turn the ignition OFF 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine WARNING e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought up above
365. ractors ALR Mode ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 a A disi die 4 How To Use Remote Start o oL LLL 25 Center Lap Belts eese PRESS RR tss 44 Boot Locks 6662548266 Xx uro don SOR 27 seas Bele rakensin ID ECUIDDSGS queden Manual Door Locks 00 27 as dd age mE 45 Pyer Door Loska F ERNEA artius a Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 46 he EROS OF ERE ene y aeons m Seat Belt Extender esses er ed ura 46 ees THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags sects canis Re be ee B REY 47 Event Data Recorder EDR 58 Child Restraints 00 60 Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 73 aue Tips 4 4 oilseed xar ER RES 74 Transporting Passengers sess 74 Exhaust GaSe a reramanne gc a u PEE 74 PEN Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle s a sks ded hg Ree Shake eee ee 75 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 76 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place
366. re injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE Never back down a hill in NEU TRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down e If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know 296 STARTING AND OPERATING ME your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if CAUTION something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested Water ingestion into the axles transmission transfer water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water too fast or thr
367. reme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse affect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if
368. result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vap
369. rgo Wight c a9 ccs bsrso ui pe PES ER LER ees CD Compact Disc Player Cellular Phone iiia t e n Center High Mounted Stop Light Center Lap Belts sete oo rus rpk e ES Center Seat Storage Compartment Certification Label seg ssiri auaa naiiba ia 512 INDEX aaa Chart lire SiZig essi m Pe eae de 347 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 194 429 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 74 Checks Safety ss desa exea RR RD RR DEOR a 74 Child Restraint iu eee e c9 dE eS 60 61 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 64 68 Child Seat ida ree ROT dad Sake ade PI 61 67 Cigar Liehtet s rezes angs t mie IER PREISE 164 Cleaning Wheels 5 scere der athens der S abere 454 Climate Control ais oi oped mee 234 IG quera saccamuebr d Suo ace ees 201 204 218 224 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 232 Comp asS a so pd debeo e RE es 150 151 Compass Calibration 0000 151 Compass Variance llle 152 Computer Trip Travel 0 00 146 Console Overhead 0 000000 eee 145 Contract Service xiii Cae ok Ba ae ares 503 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 444 Cooling System cse e Re rp ERRORES 441 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 443 Coolant Capacity llle 478 Coolant Level 2 0 0000s 441 445 Disposal of Used Coolant 445 Drain Flush and Refill LLL 442 INSpectiOn xs caesa
370. ring a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Continued 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate seat next to your arm on the pillar Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 1 Latch Plate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 3 When the belt is extended long enough to fit insert the WARNING e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion cou
371. rior fogging of the glass They are located in the extreme outside upper edges of the instrument panel The demisters also pro vide extra air ducts for circulation They are in operation whenever the Floor Mix or Defrost modes are in use NOTE When you turn off the engine you may hear a hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of time This is a normal condition that occurs if the air conditioning system has been on It is not an indication of a problem with the air conditioning system 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown turn the blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position turn the mode control to the panel fresh position press the snowflake button to turn on the air conditioning and drive with the windows open for the first few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and press the recirculation pushbutton on dual zone control or switch the mode from panel fresh to panel recirculate on single zone control When a comfortable condition has been reached choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control slide and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For high humidity conditions it may be neces sary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy o
372. rior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deploy ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 ment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered t
373. river is not in the vehicle NOTE Always refer to the Equipment Identification Plate When Ordering Parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll Hazard Warning Flasher H Jacking Instructions Jack Location Removing The Spare Tire Tire Changing Procedure Preparations Instructions Hub Caps Wheel Covers M Hoisting Bl jump Starting Procedures lll Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle 4 Wheel Drive Vehicles 2 Wheel Drive Vehicles 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning The Hazard Warning flasher switch is mounted on the flasher When the switch is activated all directional top of the steering column turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may discharge your battery Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
374. rror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dim ming feature is activated 030407085 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your right side convex mirror could cause you to collide with an 030406002 other vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the right side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex right side mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Outside Mirrors Folding Feature All 6 x 9 in exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Power Mirrors If Equipped The controls for the power mi
375. rrors are located on the driver s door trim panel 030407140 Power Mirror Switches Select the left or right mirror using the top switch then press one of the four arrows on the bottom switch to adjust the mirror Once the mirror is adjusted set the top switch to the center off position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Power Mirror Movement Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra wide loads To change position inboard or out board the mirror head should be rotated flipped in or out Trailer Towing Position 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main mirror surface k Blindspot Mirror uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for uconnect phone operating instruc tions for these radios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner o
376. rth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 505 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Depart
377. ry emergency use only ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 Tires designed to this standard have the letter I e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and
378. s Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Air Cleaner Filter used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are proper maintenance intervals recommended Maintenance Free Battery WARNING The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic provide a measure of protection in the case of engine maintenance required backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary e Battery fluid is
379. s and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades T
380. s including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 l
381. s a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags Sea 2 022605988 1 Driver and Passenger Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 steering wheel The passenger front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle may also be equipped with wi
382. s ade rede Aa pre Ea Gene ae Daytime Running llle Dual Wheel Assembly Rear Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 22 2129 33 Rx R GR 197 340 Engine Temperature Warning 200 EXtetlOR62iccck ee 9 xor a RR 76 FOS RT 135 193 468 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 264 Hazard Warning Flasher 406 Headlights 224 0 64s Le RR ias 134 High Beam ei isthe Sew de ES 137 189 High Beam Indicator sss eseted as erene 189 High Beam Low Beam Select 137 Illuminated Eny sere sommes 20 Instrument Cluster llle 188 Interior a le sioen epus tete db s 132 145 Lights On Reminder 000 135 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 194 Oil Pressure x22 2 i 2c werd Ecce eS 201 Passing cues doesuue ate Me aes ue oo sae 137 Seat Belt Reminder lesen 189 518 INDEX MM Security Alarm Theft Alarm 191 Service ges abba kk GRO REESE 464 465 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 194 Side Marker 2 2 sos ees s n 477 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 191 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 197 Traction Control 2 2 eee ee ee 340 Transfer Case 2 essem anes 264 Transmission Warning llle 199 Turm Signal sies ve RR RE es 76 136 465 469 Voltage m 201 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 188 Limited Slip Differential 304 Loading Vehicle 5
383. s listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 483 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicat ing that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Cha
384. s set to a specified fuel tank volume and DTE is an estimated distance calculation based on vehicle fuel economy and remaining fuel tank volume Vehicle fuel tank volumes are as follows e 26 gal 98 L 1500 short box models e 34 gal 128 L 1500 2500 3500 short box models e 35 gal 132 L 1500 2500 3500 long box models 31 CRUISE Indicator This indicator lights when the electronic speed CRUISE control system is turned on 32 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information 33 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driv
385. say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Frequency to change the frequency Next Station to select the next station Previous Station to select the previous station Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Next Channel to select the next channel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Mai
386. se the first 24 characters 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will the
387. seated It is normal for the 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter s should be changed It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated ext
388. sing brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odor
389. st as an emission control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut off and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifi
390. stop cautiously ping distances Therefore after driving through If you must back down a hill back straight down using standing water drive slowly and lightly press on REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes diagonally across the hill Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your DO NOT REDUCE the tire pressures for this type of passengers and others around you driving 308 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE After off road usage particularly in sand or mud inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumu lated dirt at the propeller shaft axles U joints brake rotors and calipers Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud Check the exhaust system and all exposed components for any sign of damage If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for im pacted material Impacted foreign material can cause a wheel imbalance Removing the foreign material from the wheels will correct the situation WINCH USAGE IF EQUIPPED POWER WAGON ONLY Things To Know Before Using Your Winch G
391. switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 8 If a chime is not heard the program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If neces sary repeat the above procedure Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have the Child Protection Door Lock system Child Protection Door Lock Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To use the system open each rear door slide the lever UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child WARNING protection door locks When the system on a door is Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision engaged that door can only be opened by using the Remember that the rear doors can only be opened outside door handle even if the inside door LOCK isin from the outside when the child protection locks are the UNLOCKED position engaged NOTE After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle Child Door Lock Control 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WINDOWS Po
392. t any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellul
393. t fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only T Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 S 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid Change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet 4x4 models only c off road or frequent trailer towing T Inspect the transfer case fluid E JJ Inspect the CV Joints D 1 Inspect exhaust system T L E Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS H Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicles svar aes ethanes Gee ieee eo ce ene 501 Prepare For The Appointment 501 Prepare A Dist edd saneat estas a 501 Be Reasonable With Requests 501 H If You Need Assistance 501 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 502 Chrysler Canad
394. ted according to the Compass Variance Map i SEEAVI o 8110421 Y 6 748 QN 1040506040 RESET Button Compass Variance Map Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic NOTE The default for the compass variance is Zone 8 North and geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic To set the variance Turn the ignition ON and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 RESET button approximately five seconds The last vari ance zone number will be displayed Press the STEP button to select the new variance zone and press the RESET button to resume normal operation Outside Temperature Because the ambient temperature sensor is located under the hood engine temperature can influence the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are slowly updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h or during stop and go driving GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi cle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink
395. tems that must be con nected to properly assure operator safety and to prevent overloading vehicle systems ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing of two wheel drive models is not allowed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can result in severe transmission damage Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an acci dent Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND CAUTION MOTORHOME ETC CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe damage to the transmission and or transfer case NOTE Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL for recreational towing Automatic transmissions must be shifted into the PARK position for recreational towing Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL shifting procedure for your vehicle damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing 398 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Recreational Towing Procedure Manual Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is n
396. tery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the HomeLink display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the indicator s change from a slow to a rapid flash rate Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train If the signal is too weak to train replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the indicator s blink rapidly for two seconds and then remains constant continue with the next section Pro gramming A Rolling Code System NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage d
397. th Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 502 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufac
398. th the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 402 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Returning to Normal Operation Electronic Shift Transfer Case Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Depress the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object depress the recessed transfer case Neutral N button for one second 7 After the Neutral indicator light turns off release the Neutral N button 8 After the Neutral N button has been released the transfer case will shift into the position identified by the selector switch 9 Shift the transmission into PARK NOTE e The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL from the 4AUTO if equipped position Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the transfer case Neutral N button and must continue to be met until one second elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of step 3 key ON are not met prior to depressing the Neutral N button or are no longer met during the one second time then all of the mode position indicator lights will fl
399. the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before driving Safety Latch 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel Headlight Switch Location Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the upward detent position or by pressing the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if equipped When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the off detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are re quired during the
400. the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal the engine has started ignite and damage the held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should converter and vehicle be repeated Continued battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in Section 6 If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Se After Starting AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow The engine block heater warms the engine and permits ing precautions are not observed quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a e Shift into PA
401. the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low tem perature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS warning light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS warning light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information As an example assume your vehicle has a recommended cold tire inflation placard pressure parked for more than 3 hours of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause th
402. thorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light
403. thorized Chrysler Dealer 485 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se M A B I M Ng 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule N Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate tires N filter 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Ml Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 4x4 models only M Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary T Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid 1 Lube front drive shaft fitting 2500 3500 4x4 models only H Change if using your vehicle for police Q Inspect the CV joints E taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer J Inspect exhaust system D towing U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rot
404. tification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with 9 504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and bi
405. torage compartment Regular Cab models also have storage behind the seat The Quad Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seat Lift the seat to access the storage compart ment Quad Cab Storage 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers If Equipped Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the rear seat Grocery Bag Hooks REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster and Heated Outside Mirrors If Equipped The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled
406. tton again Window Lockout Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if equipped window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an ex
407. turer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D E In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 503 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Iden
408. ufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for correct fluid type Fluid Level Check If your vehicle is equipped with a dipstick use the following procedure If your vehicle has a capped dip stick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly The fluid level should be checked when the engine is fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at normal operating tempera ture Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced Fluid Level Check 545RFE Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 82 C 180 F This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK
409. und The tire pressures are now required to be inflated to the max load inflation pressure cold values described on the Tire and Loading Informa tion label The Tire and Loading Information label is located on the drivers side B pillar If the tire light load inflation switch LED turns OFF the TPMS has been reset and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure cold low pressure warning thresholds Tire Pressure Monitor System Components The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Wheel Sensors e Two Trigger Modules mounted in the front wheel wells Tire Light Load Inflation Switch located in the instru ment panel e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible chec
410. und level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the TUNE control again or wait five seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push
411. use you to lose control The seat belt might not be pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be properly adjusted and you could be injured Only sure the seat is locked into position adjust a seat while the vehicle is parked Manual Seat Adjuster es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Reclining Seats Quad Cab Models WARNING The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion Pull upward on the handle to release the seat You can be seriously even fatally injured riding in a back lean forward or rearward to the desired position seat with the seatback reclined Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest If you ride in this position the shoulder harness will no longer be restraining you In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries Only recline in a seat when the vehicle is parked Seat Recliner Handle 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Racing Sets 5000600 Mode The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat WARNING cushion Pull upward on the handle to release the seat You can be seriously even fatally injured riding in a back lean forward or rearward to the desired position seat with the seatback reclined Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest If you ride in this position the s
412. ush against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tions However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts or the underbody ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419 CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis sion cannot be started this way Also there is a greater risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or towed If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greate
413. ushion es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Rear Seat Features Reclining Rear Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion Pull upward on the handle to release the seatback and lean forward or rearward to the desired position Tilt Adjustment CAUTION Do not place anything under a power seat It may cause damage to the seat or the seat controls Rear Seat Recliner Handle 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat Table Mode If Equipped 2 Fold the seatback forward Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down and used as a table To fold down either rear seatback 1 Lift the handle located next to the head restraint Table Mode 3 Lift the seatback to return the seat to the upright position Be sure the seatback is locked in place Table Mode Handle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Folding Rear Seat Kneel Mode If Equipped WARNING Both the left and right rear seats can be folded flat kneel WARNING mode and used for carrying cargo Each of the rear It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area seatbacks provide two D rings and rear storage bin lids inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people with two slotted cutouts Use a cargo tie downs to secure riding in these areas are more likely to be seri cargo ously injured or killed Do not allow peop
414. using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR button and say Help or Main Menu 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Commands The Voice Recognition VR system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may
415. uvers WARNING e ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP in this section of this manual This brake pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping to non slippin
416. v ing conditions the switch should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position In the AXLE UNLOCK position the front and rear axles are unlocked In the REAR LOCK position the rear axle is locked In the FRONT REAR LOCK position the front and rear axles are locked NOTE Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position the limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque biasing capability for moderate low traction environments During the command to lock the axle the indicator light will flash until the axle is locked After the lock command has been successfully executed the light will remain on solid To lock the rear axle place the vehicle in 4LO Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section of the manual Move the axle locker switch position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph 5 km h The RR indicator light will remain on when the rear axle is locked en STARTING AND OPERATING 281 NOTE Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to allow the axle to fully lock If the indicator light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR LOCK or FRONT REAR LOCK position drive the ve hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking action WARNING Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving A locked front axle is intended for off road driving only Locking the front axle during on road driving will reduce the steering ability This could cause an
417. vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side WARNING windows fully open Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly ADDING FUEL Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 in monoxide poisoning 50 mm inside the opening If using a portable fuel container it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon force open the restricting door monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill 5 Never run the engine in a closed area such as a CAUTION garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is Damage to the fuel system or emissions control stopped in an open area with the engine running for system could result from using an improper fuel more than a short period adjust the ventilation system tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap to force fresh outside air into the vehicle could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitted aftermarket cap can cause the MIL Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time Continued 380 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Continued NOTE Tighten the gas cap 1 4 turn until you hear on
418. vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises ar
419. vel during applica tion greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light If Equipped during brake use 3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro boost system during hard braking conditions NOTE Under cold temperatures pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System WARNING The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment It may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals The Four Wheel Anti lock Brake System ABS is de signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ME The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation This
420. veral times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 7 to re enable HSA functionality Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM The ERM system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur Continued 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety
421. w range 4WD LOW e Neutral N This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the transfer case switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD en STARTING AND OPERATING 273 LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents 81977fda NEUTRAL Button NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by depressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the transfer case switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a differ ent transfer case position the Transfer Cas
422. wer Windows lf Equipped 021907136 Power Window Switches The control on the left front door panel has Up Down switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of Quad Cab and Mega Cab models The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position and for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or a front door is opened NOTE The Power Accessory Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Auto Down Driver s Side Only The driver s window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will automatically go down Window Lockout Switch 4 Door Models Only The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCK button To enable the window controls press the window LOCK bu
423. will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate HSA on Automatic Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL Towing and Hauling with HSA Vehicles Equipped with Automatic Transmissions Only The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer unless the TOW HAUL button located on the shift lever is selected When activated the TOW HAUL light will illuminate in the instrument cluster For more information on the TOW HAUL mode refer to When To Use TOW HAUL and O D OFF Modes under Automatic Transmission in Section 5 In order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver comfort while launching on a hill the system recognizes when the TOW HAUL button is activated and compen sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling down the hill WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pr
424. will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the alarm is activated the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals For the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights and Ve
425. ximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the transfer case NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Delayed shifts out of four wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear low or uneven tire pressures excessive vehicle loading or cold tempera tures WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the dr
426. y be used 1 Press the VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recogni tion 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle Proper use of the seats is needed for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Se T warning The front seats are adjustable forward or rearward The ISIE adjustment handle is located at the front edge of each seat Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is cushion Pull upward on the handle and slide the seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could forward or rearward to the desired position Using body ca
427. y road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maxi mum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section Shifting Procedure Electronically Shifted Transfer Case NOTE e If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will turn OFF the selected Transfer Case Position Indicator Light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is completed Transfer Case Position Indicator Light for
428. you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the 2500 3500 Regular Cab passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat outboard positions LATCH equipped seating positions feature both lower anchor bars located at the back of the seat cushion and tether strap anchorages located behind the seatback Refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later in this section ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Identification dots are located above the standard cab front seat lower anchorages
429. your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following procedure ESN SID Access with REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACC position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simul taneously for three seconds The first four digits of the 12 digit ESN SID number will display Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M press the SEEK UP button until all 12 ESN SID digits display The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits display The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or five minutes have passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access with RAQ and RAK Radios With the ignition switch in the ACC position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simul taneously for three seconds All twelve ESN SID
430. ypes of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four or six in case of trucks with dual rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in 75 mph 120 km h the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions DO NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Se For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one DO NOT spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear i

Dodge 2009 Ram 1500 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents